1. Fanuc
  2. Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/

Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/ Maintenance manual Page 165

Maintenance manual
B–63525EN/02
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
135
Depending on the eye level and the viewing angle of the operator, the LCD
may be hard to read. This problem can be solved by adjusting the contrast.
The contrast of a monochrome LCD can be adjusted.
1. Press the
OFFSET
SETTING
function key.
2. Press the [SETTING] chapter selection soft key.
The LCD contrast item is displayed on the setting (handy) screen.
SETTING(HANDY)
PARAMETER WRITE = 1(0:DISABLE 1: ENABLE)
TV CHECK = 0(0:OFF 1:ON)
PUNCH CODE = 0(0:EIA 1:ISO)
INPUT UNIT = 0(0:MM 1:INCH)
I/O CHANNEL = 0(0–3:CHANNEL NO.)
SEQUENCE NO. = 0(0:OFF 1:ON)
TAPE EORMAT = 0(0:NO CNV 1:F15)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(PROGRAM NO.)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(SEQUENCE NO.)
[ CONTRAST ]( + = [ ON:1 ] – = [ OFF:0 ])
>_
MDI **** *** *** 00:00:00
[NO.SRH] [ ON:1 ] [OFF:0] [+INPUT] [INPUT]
3. Move the cursor to “CONTRAST”.
4. Adjust the contrast by pressing the operation soft key [ON:1] or
[OFF:0].
The 7.2–inch monochrome LCD (connecting using CRT Link) is
provided with a contrast adjustment potentiometer and video signal
adjustment switches.
The contrast is adjusted when the LCD adapter or panel is replaced.
Otherwise, it should not be necessary to use the adjustment switches.
VRP1
SW1
VR1
7.2–inch monochrome LCD (rear view)
1.17
CONTRAST
ADJUSTMENT
7.2–inch Monochrome
LCD (CRT Link)
Adjustment
Adjustment points
Previous page
Next page

Contents Summary of Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/ Maintenance manual

  • Page 1                      
  • Page 2                                                            
  • Page 3SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). CNC maintenanc
  • Page 4SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63525EN/02 1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the maintenance personnel (herein referred to as the user) and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their
  • Page 5B–63525EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION WARNING 1. When checking the operation of the machine with the cover removed (1) The user’s clothing could become caught in the spindle or other components, thus presenting a danger of injury. When checking the operation, stand aw
  • Page 6SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63525EN/02 WARNING 5. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to d
  • Page 7B–63525EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3 WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT WARNING 1. Always turn off the power to the CNC and the main power to the power magnetics cabinet. If only the power to the CNC is turned off, power may continue to be supplied to the serve section. In such a case, replacing a unit ma
  • Page 8SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63525EN/02 4 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS WARNING 1. When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a parameter, close the machine cover. Never use the automatic operation function immediately after such a modification. Instead, confirm normal machine operation
  • Page 9B–63525EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 5 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE WARNING 1. Memory backup battery replacement When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with th
  • Page 10SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63525EN/02 WARNING 2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those
  • Page 11B–63525EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING 3. Fuse replacement Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When replacing
  • Page 12
  • Page 13B–63525EN/02 PREFACE PREFACE Description of 1.Display and operation this manual This chapter covers those items, displayed on the screen, that are related to maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also provided at the end of this chapter. 2.LCD–mounted type i series hardware 3.LCD–mounte
  • Page 14PREFACE B–63525EN/02 Appendix A. Alarm list B. List of maintenance parts C. Boot system D. Memory card slot E. LED display and maintenance of stand–alone type unit F. Maintenance of open CNC (boot–up and IPL) G. FSSB start–up procedure/materials H. Notation of MDI keys This manual does not provide a
  • Page 15B–63525EN/02 PREFACE NOTE Some function described in this manual may not be applied to some products. For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual (B–63522EN) Related manuals of The following table lists the manuals related to Series 16i, Series 18i, Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/ Series 21i, Series 160i
  • Page 16PREFACE B–63525EN/02 Specification Manual name number PMC PMC Ladder Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61863E PMC C Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61863E–1 Network I/O Link–II OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62924EN Profibus–DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62924EN Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board B–63354EN OPERATOR’S M
  • Page 17B–63525EN/02 PREFACE D FANUC SERVO MOTOR a series This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR ai series of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information, refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually connected. p–5
  • Page 18
  • Page 19B–63525EN/02 Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 20TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63525EN/02 1.10 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 1.10.1 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 21B–63525EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.4.4 Sub–CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 2.4.5 RISC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 22TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63525EN/02 4.4 CONNECTOR AND CARD CONFIGURATIONS OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . . . . 280 4.4.1 Main CPU Board of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 4.4.2 Sub–CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 23B–63525EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.1.2 Mounting a Card PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 5.2 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 5.2.1 Demounting a
  • Page 24TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63525EN/02 6.2.12 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 6.2.13 Inputting Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 25B–63525EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7.5 LIST OF INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 7.6 LIST OF ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 26TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63525EN/02 8.8.2 Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 8.8.3 Checking the Setting of Each Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 8.8.4 Checking C
  • Page 27B–63525EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 11.1.1 Investigating the Conditions Under which Failure Occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725 11.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . 727 11.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 28TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835 A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES (CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 29B–63525EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954 F.3
  • Page 30
  • Page 31B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function keys. The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed. 1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWE
  • Page 321. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.1 Operations and soft key display staturs for each function key are described below: FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS 1.1.1 To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a soft key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations. Soft Keys The
  • Page 33B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION POSITION SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS POS Absolute coordinate display [ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC] [RUNPRE] [EXEC] Relative coordinate display [REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET] [ORIGIN] [ALLEXE] [Axis name] [EXEC] [PTSPR
  • Page 341. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the MEM mode 1/2 PROG Program display screen [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” [O number] [O SRH] (1) [N number] [N SRH] [REWIND] [P TYPE] [Q TYPE] [F SR
  • Page 35B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 2/2 (2) [FL.SDL] [PRGRM] Return to (1) (Program display) File directory display screen [DIR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT] (File No. ) [F SET] [EXEC] Schedule operation display screen [SCHDUL] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] (Schedule data) [INPUT] 5
  • Page 361. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the EDIT mode 1/2 PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” (O number) [O SRH] (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] [F SRH] [CAN] (N n
  • Page 37B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 2/2 (1) Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program [READ] [CHAIN] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] Graphic Conversational Programming
  • Page 381. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the MDI mode PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” Program input screen [MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is press
  • Page 39B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” Current block display screen [CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the s
  • Page 401. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the TJOG or THDL mode PROG Program input screen [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SR
  • Page 41B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION PROG PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key (When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed in all modes) 1/2 PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–END] (O number) [O SRH] (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] [F SRH] [CAN] (N number) [
  • Page 421. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 2/2 (1) Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program [READ] [CHAIN] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] Graphic Conversational Programming [C.A.P.] [PRGRM] Return to the program [G.M
  • Page 43B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Soft key transition triggered by the OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (T series) function key OFFSET SETTING 1/2 OFFSET SETTING Tool offset screen [OFFSET] [WEAR] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [GEOM] (Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR] (Axis name) [INP.C.] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Nu
  • Page 441. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 2/2 (1) Pattern data input screen [MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT] Software operator’s panel screen [OPR] Tool life management setting screen [TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] (Numeral) [INPUT] Y–axis tool offset screen [OFST.2] [WEAR] [(
  • Page 45B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Soft key transition triggered by the OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (M series) function key OFFSET SETTING 1/2 OFFSET SETTING Tool offset screen [OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name) [INP.C.] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [CLEAR] [ALL] [WEAR] [GEOM] [REA
  • Page 461. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 2/2 (1) Patten data input screen [MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT] Software operator’s panel screen [OPR] Tool life management setting screen [TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] (Numeral) [INPUT] 16
  • Page 47B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM 1/3 SYSTEM Parameter screen [PARAM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [READ] [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] [CAN] [EXEC] Diagnosis screen [DGNOS] [(OPRT)] (
  • Page 481. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 (1) (2) (3) 2/3 [DUMP] [SEARCH] [BYTE] [WORD] [D.WORD] [DRARA]/[NDPARA] [PMCDGN] [TITLE] [STATUS] [SEARCH] [ALARM] [TRACE] [T.DISP]/[TRCPRM] [EXEC] [M.SRCH] [SEARCH] [INPUT] [ANALYS] [SCOPE] [SGNPRM] With [DELETE] [START]/[STOP] PMC–RC [INIT] [T–SRCH] only [ADRE
  • Page 49B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION (4) 3/3 Pitch error compensation screen [PITCH] [(OPRT)] (No.) [NO SRH] [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [READ] [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] [CAN] [EXEC] Servo parameter screen [SV.PRM] [SV.SET] [ON:1] [(OPRT)] [SV.TUN] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [INPUT] [TRAC
  • Page 501. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE MESSAGE Alarm display screen [ALARM] Message display screen [MSG] Alarm history screen [HISTRY] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] HELP SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP HELP Alar
  • Page 51B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION GRAPHIC SCREEN (T series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH Tool path graphics Mode 0 GRAPH Tool path graphics [G.PRM] [(OPRT)] [NORMAL] [GRAPH] [(OPRT)] [ZOOM] [HEAD] [ERASE] [ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [ACT] [PROCES] [HI/LO] [EXEC] [STOP] A.ST/Path g
  • Page 521. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 GRAPHIC SCREEN (M series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH Tool path graphics GRAPH Tool path graphics [PARAM] [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [AUTO] [STSRT] [STOP] [REWIND] [CLEAR] [ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [EXEC] [←] [→] [POS] [↑] [↓] Solid graphics GRAPH Solid g
  • Page 53B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON 1.2.1 Types of PCBs mounted on the slots are displayed. If a hardware trouble or an incorrect mounting is found, this screen is Slot Status Display displayed. D Slot state screen SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLA
  • Page 541. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Software ID 40 : Main CPU 41 : C language 43 : Sub CPU 49 : CAP II 4A : Remote buffer 4F : PMC–RE 53 : Loader control 59 : RISC board for high–precision contour control 5E : HSSB interface (with PC) 1.2.2 Setting Module Screen END : Setting B0H1–01 completed C
  • Page 55B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.3 After the system has been installed correctly, you can find the PCBs installed and the softwares integrated on the system configuration screen. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN 1.3.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key. Display Method (2) Press soft key [SYSTEM], then the syste
  • Page 561. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Module ID ID Name D5 Series 16i motherboard C5 Series 18i motherboard CC Series 160i motherboard EC Series 180i motherboard CD Serial communication board: remote buffer/DNC2 Serial communication board: DNC1 C language board CAP–II board CE Sub–CPU board CF RIS
  • Page 57B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.3.3 Kind of software Software Configuration Software series Screen SYSTEM CONFIG (SOFTWARE) 01234 N12345 PAGE:02 SYSTEM B0H0 0001 Software version BASIC+OPTION–A1 Software SERVO 90B0 0001 configuration PMC(SYS) 406G 0001 406G 0001 PMC(LAD) FS16 0001 Character
  • Page 581. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.3.5 D αi series servo and αi series spindle ID Information Screen When the αi servo/αi spindle system is connected, ID information owned by connected units (motor, amplifier, module, etc.) for αi (αi Servo Information servo/αi spindle can be displayed on the C
  • Page 59B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN 1.4.1 Alarm History Screen 1.4.1.1 Alarms generated in the NC are recorded. The latest 25 alarms generated General are recorded. The 26th and former alarms are deleted. 1.4.1.2 (1) Press MESSAGE key . Screen Display (2) Press soft key [H
  • Page 601. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3112 EAH [Data type] Bit #3 (EAH) The alarm history function: 0 : Does not record the messages output with external alarms or macro alarms. 1 : Records the messages output with external alarms or macro alarms. 1.4.2 System Alarm History 1
  • Page 61B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SYSTEM ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345 1 2001–03–13 12:13:19 930 CPU INTERRUPT 2 2001–03–11 07:23:07 900 ROM PARITY 3 2001–02–27 973 NON MASK INTERRUPT EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52 [ ][ ][ NMIHIS ][ ][ ] [ SELECT ][ RETURN ][ CLEAR ][ ][ ] [SELECT] soft key This soft k
  • Page 621. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.4.2.3 The system alarm history screen (detail screen) displays information System alarm history items such as registers and stacks involved when a system alarm is issued. screen (detail screen) The following items are displayed: 1. System alarm occurrence date
  • Page 63B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SYSTEM ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345 2 2001–03–11 07:23:07 BDH1–01(2/4) 973 NON MASK INTERRUPT STACK (PL0) 3646 0338 7CBA 0001 0958 FFF8 0068 0063 0346 0000 0000 02BC 08F8 52F1 2438 0338 0580 0440 0580 001F 03C0 0214 0780 0FFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
  • Page 641. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 CAUTION 1 In the case of an NMI on other than the main board, the registers of detail display screen 1, and the contents of detail display screen 2 and detail display screen 3 are displayed. SYSTEM ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345 2 2001–03–11 07:23:07 BDH1–01(1/1) 97
  • Page 65B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.4.2.4 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3103 NMH [Data type] Bit NMH The system alarm history screen is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3110 OPC [Data type] Bit OPC On the operation history screen, the [CLEAR] soft key is: 0 : Not en
  • Page 661. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.5 This function enables the saving of external operator messages as a record. EXTERNAL The record can be viewed on the external operator message history screen. OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD 1.5.1 (1) Press the MESSAGE function key. Screen Display (2) Press the rig
  • Page 67B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.5.3 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3113 MS1 MS0 MHC #0 (MHC) The records of an external operator message: 0 : Cannot be erased. 1 : Can be erased. #6, #7 (MS0,MS1) These bits set the number of characters to be retained in each record of an external operator
  • Page 681. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.6 This function displays the key and signal operations performed by the operator upon the occurrence of a fault or the output of an alarm, together OPERATION with the corresponding alarms. HISTORY This function records the following data: (1) MDI key operation
  • Page 69B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 12801 Number of a signal symbol table for selecting an operation history signal (01) 12802 Number of a signal symbol table for selecting an operation history signal (02) 12803 Number of a signal symbol table for selecting an operation history signal (03) 12804 N
  • Page 701. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 12841 Number of a signal selected as an operation history signal (01) 12842 Number of a signal selected as an operation history signal (02) 12843 Number of a signal selected as an operation history signal (03) 12844 Number of a signal selected as an operation hi
  • Page 71B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12881 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 History record bit settings for an operation history signal (01) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12882 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 History record bit settings for an operation history signal (02) #7 #6 #5
  • Page 721. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12896 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 History record bit settings for an operation history signal (16) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12897 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 History record bit settings for an operation history signal (17) #7 #6 #5
  • Page 73B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.6.2 Screen Display D Displaying the operation (1) Press the SYSTEM function key. history (2) Press the continue menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] (OPERATION HISTORY) soft key are displayed. (3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key twice. The operation history screen is displa
  • Page 741. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Data displayed on the operation history screen (1) MDI keys Address and numeric keys are displayed after a single space. Soft keys are displayed in square brackets ([]). Other keys (RESET/INPUT, for example) are displayed in angle brackets (<>). A key pressed at
  • Page 75B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Mode selection signals and rapid traverse override signals are displayed as indicated below: Input signal Name displayed MD1 ND2 MD4 REF DNC1 0 0 0 0 0 MDI 1 0 0 0 0 MEM 1 0 0 0 1 RMT 0 1 0 0 0 NOMODE 1 1 0 0 0 EDT 0 0 1 0 0 H/INC 1 0 1 0 0 JOG 1 0 1 1 0 REF 0 1
  • Page 761. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1) The power–on time is displayed as shown below: 01/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day 09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second 2) The power–off time and the time when an NC alarm occurred are displayed in reverse video. 01/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day 09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Se
  • Page 77B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.6.3 (1) On the operation history signal selection screen, press the [(OPE)] soft Setting The Input key. Signal or Output Signal OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000 to Be Recorded in The Operation History No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL 01 G0004 00000010 11 *
  • Page 781. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Parameter–based setting By setting bit 4 (PHS) of parameter No. 3206, setting and display on the operation history signal selection screen can be linked with parameter No. 12801 through No. 12900. By this linking, setting information related to input and outpu
  • Page 79B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G020 f f f f f f f f to G042 f f f f f f f f G043 f × f × × f f f G044 f f f f f f MLK BDT1 G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2 G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 f SBK f G047 f f f f f f f f to G060 f f f f f f f f G061 f f f f f f f
  • Page 801. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G115 f f f f f f f f G116 *–L8 *–L7 *–L6 *–L5 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1 G117 f f f f f f f f G118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1 G119 f f f f f f f f G120 *–ED8 *–ED7 *–ED6 *–ED5 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1 G121 f f f f f f f f to
  • Page 81B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 2. List of Address for 2–path control MT→PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X000 f f f f f f f f to X127 f f f f f f f f PMC→CNC (Signals for tool post 1) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 f f f f f f f f to G003 f f f f f f f f G004 f f f f FIN f f f G005 f f f f TFIN SFIN
  • Page 821. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G061 f f f f f f f RGTA G062 f f f f f f f f to G099 f f f f f f f f G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 G101 f f f f f f f f G102 –J8 –J7 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1 G103 f f f f f f f f to G105 f f f f f f f f G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3
  • Page 83B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 G127 f f f f f f f f to G129 f f f f f f f f G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G131 f f f f f f f f G132 f f f f +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 G133 f f f f f f f f G134 f f f f –MIT4 –MIT3
  • Page 841. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1020 f f f f f f f f to G1042 f f f f f f f f G1043 f × f × × f f f G1044 f f f f f f MLK BDT1 G1045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2 G1046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 f SBK f G1047 f f f f f f f f to G1060 f f f f f f f f G1061 f f f
  • Page 85B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1116 *–L8 *–L7 *–L6 *–L5 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1 G1117 f f f f f f f f G1118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1 G1119 f f f f f f f f G1120 *–ED8 *–ED7 *–ED6 *–ED5 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1 G1121 f f f f f f f f to G1125 f f f f f
  • Page 861. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.6.4 Recorded data can be output to an input/output unit connected via a Inputting and reader/punch interface. An output record can be input from the input/output unit. Outputting the Set the input/output unit to be used in setting parameters No. 0020 and Opera
  • Page 87B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1) Header T 0 C O P E R A T I O N H I S T O R Y ; C: Data word 2) MDI/soft key T 5 0 P 0 to 1 H * * ; P0: Usually P1: At power–on H **: Key code (See the following table.) 3) Signal T 5 1 P 0 to 6 N 0 to 255 H * * , * * ; New data Old data P0: X0000 and above P2
  • Page 881. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 4) Alarm T 5 2 P 0 to 10 N * * * * ; P0: P/S No. 100 P1: P/S No. 000 P2: P/S No. 101 P3: P/S No. 0001 to 254 P4: Overtravel alarm P5: Overheat alarm P6: Servo alarm P7: System alarm P8: APC alarm P9: Spindle alarm P10: P/S alarm No. 5000 to 5999 P15: External al
  • Page 89B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6) MDI/soft key of path 2 T 5 4 P 0 to 1 H * * ; P0: Usually P1: At power–on H **: KCB code (See the following table.) 7) Signal of path 2 T 5 5 P 2, 6 N 1000 to 1255 H * * , * * ; New data Old data P2: G1000 and above P6: F1000 and above N***: DI/DO number H **
  • Page 901. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Key codes (MDI/soft key) (00H to 7FH) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 Space 0 @ P 1 ! 1 A Q 2 ” 2 B R 3 # 3 C S 4 $ 4 D T 5 % 5 E U 6 & 6 F V 7 ’ 7 G W 8 ( 8 H X 9 ) 9 I Y A ; * : J Z (EOB) B + K [ C ’ < L ¥ D – = M ] E . > N F / ? O – 60
  • Page 91B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION (80H to FFH) 8 9 A B C D E F 0 Reset F0 * * 1 MMC F1 * * 2 CNC F2 * * 3 F3 * 4 Shift Insert F4 * * 5 Delete F5 * * 6 CAN Alter F6 * * 7 F7 * 8 Cur→ Input POS F8 * * * * 9 Cur← PROG F9 * * * A Cur↓ Help OFFSET * * SETTING * B Cur↑ SYSTEM * * C MESSAGE * D CUSTOM
  • Page 921. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.6.5 (1) While the operation history screen is displayed, no information can be Notes recorded to the history. (2) An input signal having an on/off width of up to 16 msec is not recorded in the history. Some signals are not recorded in the history. (3) Once the
  • Page 93B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.7 HELP FUNCTION 1.7.1 The help function displays alarm information, operation method and a table of contents for parameters. This function is used as a handbook. General 1.7.2 Press HELP key on any screen other than PMC screen, then a help screen Display Metho
  • Page 941. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Help for operation (1) Press [2 OPR], then a menu for operation method is displayed. HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345 1. PROGRAM EDIT 2. SEARCH 3. RESET 4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI 5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE 6. OUTPUT 7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE 8. OUTPUT WITH FA
  • Page 95B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D Parameter table Press soft key [PARAM], then a parameter table is displayed. HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N12345 1/4 Current page/ Total ·SETTING (NO.0000~ ) page ·READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (NO.0100~ ) ·AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (NO.1000~ ) ·COORDINATE SYSTEM (
  • Page 961. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE 1.8.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key. Displaying Diagnostic (2) Press soft key [DGNOS], then a diagnostic screen is displayed. Page 1.8.2 Contents Displayed D Causes when the 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL An auxiliary function is being machine
  • Page 97B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D Cause of the cycle start LED turned off 020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Input of e
  • Page 981. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D C executor status DGN 045 C executor status [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 C executor status 0: Normal. 2: Inoperable because of an incorrect FROM content. 3: Inoperable because the power was switched on with the M and 0 keys held down. 5: Inoper
  • Page 99B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 201 ALD EXP Overload 0 – – – Motor overheat alarm 1 – – – Amplifier overheat Disconnec- 1 – – 0 Built–in pulse coder (hand) tion alarm 1 – – 1 Disconnection of separated type pulse coder (hard) 0 – – 0 Disconnection of pulse coder (so
  • Page 1001. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Details of separate serial pulse coder alarms #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 205 OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH #7(OHA): Overheat occurred in the separate pulse coder. #6(LDA): An LED error occurred in the separate pulse coder. #5(BLA): A low battery voltage occ
  • Page 101B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D Reference position shift function DGN 302 Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point [Data type] Two–word axis [Units of data] 0.001 mm (metric output), 0.0001 inch (inch output) [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 D Position de
  • Page 1021. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Machine coordinates of angular axis/orthogonal axis DGN 306 Machine coordinates of a slant axis in the Cartesian coordinate system DGN 307 Machine coordinates of an orthogonal axis in the Cartesian coordinate system [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Incremen
  • Page 103B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION NOTE 1 The temperature data must fall within the following ranges. 50_C to 160_C "5_C 160_C to 180_C "10_C 2 The temperature at which an overheat alarm is issued has a maximum error of 5_C. 3 Information on axes other than the αi servo axis is not indicated. (In
  • Page 1041. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D FSSB status #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 320 CFE ERR ERP OPN RDY OPP CLS Indicates the internal status of the FSSBC. #0(CLS): Closed. #1(OPP): Running OPEN protocol. #2(RDY): Open and ready. #3(OPN): Open. #4(ERP): Running ERROR protocol. #5(ERR): #7(CFE): Enco
  • Page 105B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION #2(DUA): 0 : The slave of interest is not on the first axis of the two–axis amplifier. 1 : The slave of interest is on the first axis of the two–axis amplifier. #3(EXT): 0 : The slave of interest does not exist. 1 : The slave of interest exists. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #
  • Page 1061. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Details of invalid servo parameter setting alarms (on the servo side) DGN 352 Detail number for invalid servo parameter setting alarm Indicates information that can be used to identify the location (parameter) and cause of an invalid servo parameter setting al
  • Page 107B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Detail Parameter Cause Measure number number 0754 2075 The setting of the parameter listed at the This parameter is presently not in use. 0755 left has overflowed. Specify 0 in it. 0764 2076 The setting of the parameter listed at the This parameter is presently
  • Page 1081. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Detail Parameter Cause Measure number number 1393 2139 The setting of the linear motor AMR offset Decrease the setting of the parameter has exceeded ±45. listed at the left to within ±45. 1446 2144 The cutting feedforward coefficient for the Use the position gai
  • Page 109B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION DGN 362 Cumulative command pulse count (SV) [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Indicates the cumulative count of movement command and compensation pulses received at the servo section since the power
  • Page 1101. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Flexible synchronization error DGN 390 Flexible synchronization error (A) DGN 391 Flexible synchronization error (B) DGN 392 Flexible synchronization error (C) DGN 393 Flexible synchronization error (D) [Data type] Two–word [Units of data] Detection units [Val
  • Page 111B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION DGN 401 Serial spindle alarm state of First spindle DGN 402 Serial spindle alarm state of Second spindle DGN 403 First spindle motor temperature DGN 404 Second spindle motor temperature [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] _C [Valid data range] 0 to 255 The αi spindl
  • Page 1121. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 409 SPE S2E S1E SHE Refer to this diagnosis when alarm 750 has generated. #3 (SPE) In spindle serial control serial spindle parameters 0 : Satisfy start condition of spindle unit 1 : Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit #2 (
  • Page 113B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 430 SS4 SS3 SSR SIC #4(SS4) 0 : Specifies not to use the fourth spindle under spindle serial control. 1 : Specifies to use the fourth spindle under spindle serial control. #3(SS3) 0 : Specifies not to use the third spindle under spind
  • Page 1141. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 439 SPE S4E S3E SHE #3(SPE): Indicates the state of the serial spindle parameter (third and fourth spindles) for spindle serial control, as follows: 0 : The start condition for the spindle unit is satisfied. 1 : The start condition fo
  • Page 115B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION DGN 451 Spindle distribution during rigid tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection units DGN 454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Detection units DGN 455 Instantaneous difference for the move comm
  • Page 1161. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 CAUTION 1 If SPL and SCF are set to 1 and #1, #2, and #3 are set to 0 in polygon synchronization mode, the operation is normal. 2 If the status does not change, even though PST is set to 1 and the program is stopped in a block including G51.2, one of the spindle
  • Page 117B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION This data indicates the cause of P/S alarm 5018 or 218. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 471 NPQ PQE NSP SUO QCL PCL #0 to #3 Cause of P/S alarm No. 5018 P/S alarm No. 5018 can be cleared by issuing a reset. The cause indication is retained until the cause is removed
  • Page 1181. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 The specified synchronization mode status is displayed. DGN 474 Rotation ratio of the master axis in spindle polygon synchronization (specified P value) In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the rotation ratio (specified P value) of the current master axis (f
  • Page 119B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D State of remote buffer (protocol A) DGN 500 Send command 1: SYN 2: RDY 3: RST 4: ALM 5: SAT 6: GTD 7: RTY 8: SDI DGN 501 Receive command 1: SYN 2: RDY 3: ARS 4: AAL 5: CLB 6: SET 7: DAT 8: EOD 9: WAT 10: RTY 11:RDI 12: SDO DGN 502 State of remote buffer 0: Not
  • Page 1201. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 513 Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (open CNC). (Hidden function) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 515 Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (channel 2). (Hidden function) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 516 Indic
  • Page 121B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D Diagnostic data related to a small–diameter peck drilling cycle (M series only) DGN 520 Total number of retractions during cutting after G83 is specified Executing the G83 command clears the value to zero. DGN 521 Total number of retractions made by receiving
  • Page 1221. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Diagnostic data related to simple synchronous control DGN 540 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchro- nas control DGN 541 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchro- nas co
  • Page 123B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION The data items displayed on the diagnosis screen are obtained at the following positions: Semi–closed loop error (No. 551) Motor Command + + + S Kp Speed Machine - + control - Servo amplifier Ps Conversion coefficients Closed loop error (Parameters No. 2078 and
  • Page 1241. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D FSSB2 status #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 620 CFE ERR ERP OPN RDY OPP CLS Indicates the internal status of the FSSBC2. #0(CLS): Closed. #1(OPP): Running OPEN protocol. #2(RDY): Open and ready. #3(OPN): Open. #4(ERP): Running ERROR protocol. #7(CFE): Encountered
  • Page 125B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 630 EXT DUA ST1 ST0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 632 EXT DUA ST1 ST0 to #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 648 EXT DUA ST1 ST0 #0, #1(ST0, ST1): Indicates the type code for an actually connected slave. ST1 ST0 Type Address 0 0 A Servo amplifi
  • Page 1261. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Slave units and the associated diagnosis numbers Slave unit 00 ³ Diagnosis No. 630, No. 631 Slave unit 01 ³ Diagnosis No. 632, No. 633 Slave unit 02 ³ Diagnosis No. 634, No. 635 Slave unit 03 ³ Diagnosis No. 636, No. 637 Slave unit 04 ³ Diagnosis No. 638, No. 63
  • Page 127B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION DGN 732 Warning status of third spindle DGN 733 Warning status of fourth spindle [Data type] Word If an error (the yellow LED flashes and the error number appears) or warning occurred in the αi spindle amplifier module (SPM), the number is displayed on the diagn
  • Page 1281. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.9 CNC STATE DISPLAY ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010 X 217.940 Y 363.233 Z 0.000 PART COUNT 5 RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S ACT.F 3000MM/M S 0 T0000 MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35 [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ] · Indicates the current status
  • Page 129B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION (3) Automatic operation status MTN: Program–specified axis movement is under way. DWL: Program–specified dwell command (G04) is being executed. ***: Other status (4) Auxiliary function status FIN: The completion signal FIN for an auxiliary function is being awai
  • Page 1301. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.10 Tuning becomes easier by graphically displaying servo error amount and torque command, etc. (Graphic option is required). WAVEFORM DIAGNOSTIC The following two types of waveform diagnosis functions are supported: FUNCTION (1) One–shot type The one–shot type
  • Page 131B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION DGN 3121 Selection of data of waveform diagnosis storage type [Data type] Byte The sixth–type sampling data of storage type of the waveform diagnosis function is: 0 : Thermal simulation data 1 : Spindle load meter data of the first spindle 1.10.2 1.Press the SYS
  • Page 1321. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 (2) Sampling period: Set the period during which data will be sampled. Valid data range: 10 to 32760 Units: ms (3) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the start of data sampling, when 1 or 2 is set for the start condition. Example
  • Page 133B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D Waveform diagnosis (1) Display start condition parameters (storage 100 : Draws a waveform for the stored data. type) (2) Sampling period: Invalid (3) Trigger: Invalid (4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for which a waveform can
  • Page 1341. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.10.3 1. Press soft key [W.GRPH], then graph of waveform diagnosis is Graphic of Wave displayed. Diagnosis data WAVE DIAGNOSE (GRAPHIC) CH1 CH2 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0 0 –0. –0. 5 5 –1. –1. 0 0 [START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF] 2. Press soft key [(OPRT)], the
  • Page 135B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Pressing the [SATART] soft key starts data sampling. While sampling is being performed, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once data sampling has been completed, a waveform is automatically displayed. WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345 CH1 CH2 EDIT ****
  • Page 1361. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.10.4 (1) Press the SYSTEM function key. Pressing the menu continuation key [ ] Data Sampling for displays the [W.DGNS] soft key. Press this soft key to display the Storage Type WAVE DIAGNOS. (PARAMETER) screen. Waveform Diagnosis (2) Press the [W.MEM] soft key
  • Page 137B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION CAUTION 1 Data items for which ***** is displayed cannot be set. 2 To change the sampling axes, enter new axis names then press the [SELECT] soft key. Pressing the [SLELCT] soft key without entering an axis name results in no sampling axis being set. 3 If the sa
  • Page 1381. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 NOTE With parameter No. 3121, choose whether the sixth–type sampling data is thermal simulation data or spindle load meter data. When spindle load meter is selected, the spindle data of the first axis is stored with each path. (4) Sampling axis: The axes along w
  • Page 139B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D Output to FANUC Floppy 1) Select EDIT mode. Cassette or FA Card 2) Press the SYSTEM key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) screen. 3) Open the write protect tab on the floppy disk or card. 4) Press the [W.MEM], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this or
  • Page 1401. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Output format In the servo alarm format, the header, date and time, selected axes, and waveform diagnosis data are output in this order. Data items are identified by ten identifier words. Output data other than the identifier words varies with the data type. T
  • Page 141B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 4) Waveform diagnosis data T 6 0 D * * , * * , * * , to * * , T 6 1 D * * , * * , * * , to * * , T 6 2 D * * , * * , * * , to * * , T 6 3 D * * , * * , * * , to * * , T 6 4 D * * , * * , * * , to * * , T 6 5 D * * , * * , * * , to * * , T 6 6 D * * , * * , * * ,
  • Page 1421. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.11 Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed meter can be displayed. OPERATING MONITOR 1.11.1 1. Set a parameter to display operating monitor. (Bit 5 (OPM) of Display Method parameter No.3111) 2. Press the POS key to display the positio
  • Page 143B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.11.2 Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 3111 OPS OPM [Data type] Bit OPM Operating monitor display is: 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled OPS The speed meter on the operating monitor screen displays: 0 : Spindle motor speed 1 : Spindle speed DGN 3151 Axis number for
  • Page 1441. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS Reset Data Param- Func- protec- Function eter Mode tion Operation tion write=1 button key Resetting run hour [(OPRT)] [RUNPRE]→[EXEC] – POS Resetting no. of [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE]→[EXEC] machined parts – POS Resetting OT alarm At Pow- er ON –
  • Page 145B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Input/Output with FANUC Cassette Data Param- Func- protec- Function eter Mode tion Operation tion write=1 button key Heading a file EDIT PROG N →File no.→[ " ]→[F SRH]→[EXEC] Deleting a file OFF EDIT PROG N →File no.→[ " ]→[DELETE→[EXEC] Collating a program EDIT
  • Page 1461. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Output to FANUC Cassette Data Param- Func- protec- Function eter Mode tion Operation tion write=1 button key EDIT [(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC] or SYSTEM Output of Emer- parameter (PA- gency Stop RAM) [ " ]→[I/O]→(CANNEL NO) 1 INPUT →(DEVICE Output of PMC SYSTEM
  • Page 147B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Edit Data Param- Func- protec- Function eter Mode tion Operation tion write=1 button key Display of memory [LIB] EDIT PROG capacity used Deleting all OFF EDIT PROG O →–9999→ DELETE programs OFF Deleting a program EDIT PROG O →Program no.→ DELETE Deleting several
  • Page 1481. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Clear Data Param- Func- prote- Function eter Mode tion Operation ction write=1 key key Memory all clear RESET M/T : AND DELETE On 2path are controlled On 2path are controlled At power Path1 : CAN AND 1 ON Path2 : CAN AND 2 Loader is controlled : CAN AND 5 Parame
  • Page 149B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Manual operation KEY PWE Func- Function Mode Operation SW =1 tion key Manual refer- Turn on Reference point return switch ³ Turn on +X, –X, +Z, or –Z ³ ence point JOG Reference point return switch LED lit. return Turn on +X, –X, +Z, or –Z ³ Use JOG FEEDRATE to s
  • Page 1501. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Function KEY PWE Func- Mode Operation SW =1 tion key Alarm history display MESSAGE [HISTRY] Screen erase Press the CAN and function keys simultaneously. The function key — — causes re–display. Screen switching between NC SHIFT and HELP and loader Graphics functi
  • Page 151B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Function KEY PWE Func- Mode Operation SW =1 tion key Tool path dia- gram data Press the GRAPH key several times ³ Display “PATH GRAPHIC setting GRAPH (PARAMETER)” screen ³ [PARAM ] ³ Enter numerals using numeric keys ³ INPUT Tool path drawing Press the GRAPH key
  • Page 1521. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Function KEY PWE Func- Mode Operation SW =1 tion key Re–drawing of “SOLID GRAPHIC Press the GRAPH key several times ³ “SOLID GRAPHIC (PARAME- GRAPH (PARAMETER)” screen ³ [REVIEW] ³ [(OPRT)] ³ [ ANEW ] ³ TER)” in a different [+ ROT ][– ROT ][+TILT ][–TILT ] orien
  • Page 153B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Boot KEY PWE Func- Function Mode Operation SW =1 tion key System mon- Pow- itor screen er–on — and a soft key at its left display time Reading file Place the cursor at 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING on the system monitor from memory screen ³ [SELECT] ³ Place the cursor
  • Page 1541. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED D Warning screen This CNC displays a warning screen when the configuration of the options using the SRAM area is changed. The data for the function indicated on the screen is cleared the next time the syste
  • Page 155B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D Allocation error screen When an option which uses the SRAM area is added, the system software may require more SRAM than is currently installed in the system. In this case, an allocation error screen appears the first time the system is turned on after the add
  • Page 1561. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.14 When an attempt is made to turn on the power to the CNC after replacing the system software, the screen shown below is displayed, and the system WARNING SCREEN is not started if the replacing new system software is not compatible with DISPLAYED WHEN the rep
  • Page 157B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.15 The maintenance information screen is provided to record the history of maintenance performed by a service person of FANUC or machine tool MAINTENANCE builder. INFORMATION The screen has the following features: SCREEN D MDI alphabetical input is allowed. D
  • Page 1581. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Status display ⋅ OVER/INSERT : OVER : Overwrite mode ; INSERT: Insert mode ⋅ EDIT/VIEW : EDIT : Editing allowed ; VIEW : Editing inhi bited ⋅ Number of empty character spaces ⋅ Current cursor line ⋅ Current cursor column D Screen operation The maintenance inform
  • Page 159B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Operation of the soft keys (1) View mode Edit Jump (2) (5) (2) Edit mode END I/O ALLDEL Jump (3) (4) (6) (5) (3) Edit saving MAINTE- NANCE IGNORE CANCEL (1) (1) (2) (4) I/O READ PUNCH CANCEL (6) (6) (2) (5) Jump BEGIN- END CANCEL ING (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (6)
  • Page 1601. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.15.2 The maintenance information can be read and punched. Maintenance When the maintenance information is input from or output to a memory card, a file name MAINTINF.DAT is used. Information (1) Format Input/Output %% Data (2) Reading When a MAINTINF.DAT file
  • Page 161B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.16 When VGA screen display is selected (NVG bit (bit 7 of parameter 3119) is set to 0), the color scheme of the VGA screen can be set on the color COLOR SETTING setting screen. SCREEN 1.16.1 1. Press the SYSTEM function key. Screen Display 2. Press the continu
  • Page 1621. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 4. Press the [LIGHT] or [DARK] operation soft key to change the luminance of the selected color element. D Storing colors A specified color palette value can be stored. (color palette values) STORE CALL COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 + 1. Select a desired storage area by
  • Page 163B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.16.3 Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3119 NVG [Data type] Bit NVG When a color display unit is used, the VGA screen display is: 0 : Selected. 1 : Not selected. (Conventional display) 6561 Standard color data of graphic color 1 6562 Standard color data of gr
  • Page 1641. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 6590 Standard color data of text color 10 6591 Standard color data of text color 11 6592 Standard color data of text color 12 6593 Standard color data of text color 13 6594 Standard color data of text color 14 6595 Standard color data of text color 15 [Data type
  • Page 165B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.17 Depending on the eye level and the viewing angle of the operator, the LCD may be hard to read. This problem can be solved by adjusting the contrast. CONTRAST The contrast of a monochrome LCD can be adjusted. ADJUSTMENT 1. Press the OFFSET SETTING function k
  • Page 1661. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Adjustment procedure (1) Contrast adjustment Potentiometer VRP1 This adjustment is made to compensate for variations between, individual LCD adapters and LCD panels. When an LCD adapter or panel is replaced, the following adjustment must be made. If the entire L
  • Page 167B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION NOTE If the ambient temperature is low, the brightness of the LCD decreases (immediately after the power is turned on, in particular). This is due to the characteristics of the LCD, and does not indicate a fault. As the ambient temperature rises, the LCD becomes
  • Page 1681. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.18 When the Power Motion series is used as an additional axis (slave) of the CNC, the power motion manager allows the slave data to be displayed and POWER MOTION set by the CNC. MANAGER The power motion manager enables the following display and setting: (1) Cu
  • Page 169B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION NOTE 1 The parameters are valid only when I/O link count extension is supported (two channels are supported). 2 Even when 0 is set, Power Mate CNC Manager communicates with channel 1 if the β amplifier with I/O links is not connected to channel 2. 3 When 1 is se
  • Page 1701. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D System configuration This screen displays the system software information of the slave. The screen screen is displayed first when the power motion manager function is selected. This screen is automatically displayed also at the termination of the function. 1.
  • Page 171B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 2. Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears. POWER MOTION MANAGER PARAMETER 1.GROUP0 / β 0000 00001000 0010 11110000 0001 00010101 0011 01010000 0002 11111011 0012 00000000 0003 00000000 0013 00000000 0004 00000000 0014 10110001 0005 10100001 001
  • Page 1721. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 D Diagnosis screen This screen shows the current status of the slave. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft keys appear: [ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][ ] 2. Press the [DGNOS] soft key. The diagnosis screen appears. The displayed d
  • Page 173B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D Alarm screen If an alarm is issued during operation, the group number of the slave causing the alarm is indicated at the right end of the message field on the screen. Check the details on the alarm screen. For example, (13) means that the first and third power
  • Page 1741. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 When five or more slaves are connected, the four–slave display has two or more pages. To see the slave data that is not displayed on the current page, press soft key [±NEXT]. POWER MOTION MANAGER/ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION O12345678 N12345 1.GROUP0 / β O12345678 N123
  • Page 175B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION D Guidance message While the following soft keys are being displayed, a guidance message is displayed in the message field. [ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ] [ WORK ][ ][MACHIN ][ ][ ] [ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][(OPRT) ] When the soft keys are displayed as shown a
  • Page 1761. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Specify a desired input device in the MD1 and MD2 bits (bits 1 and 2 of parameter 960). Connect a memory card. Alternatively, check the free area of CNC memory. Then, follow the steps given below: 1. Select the active slave. 2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The f
  • Page 177B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.18.4 Notes D Connecting an I/O Link When the Power Motion series is used as a slave of an I/O Link, the CNC assigns I/O addresses. The salve data is input and output in units of 16 bytes. Therefore, 128 input/output points are necessary. Up to eight slaves can
  • Page 1781. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.19 Using the periodic maintenance screens makes it easy to manage consumables (such as LCD unit backlight and backup battery) that are to PERIODIC be replaced periodically. MAINTENANCE SCREENS Setting the name and service life of consumables, and the countdown
  • Page 179B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 1.19.3 Up to 10 consumable items can be registered for management. Their Status Screen Display remaining service time and count status are displayed on the status screen. and Setting PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345 (STATUS) ITEM NAME REMAIN *01 BATTERY FOR C
  • Page 1801. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 Format G10 L61 Px [n] x… Registration number n… Item name [Alphanumeric characters*two–byte characters*alphanumeric characters] (b) MDI keypad–based registration An item name can be registered on the machine system menu screen by first entering it in the followi
  • Page 181B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION To erase the registered data for an item, place the cursor on the target item name, and press soft key [CLEAR], then soft key [EXEC]. [Machine system] menu screen PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345 (MACHINE) ITEM NAME 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 >_ EDIT *** *
  • Page 1821. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 [NC system] menu screen PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345 (NC) ITEM NAME 01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER 02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER 03 FAN MOTOR 04 LCD BACK LIGHT 05 06 07 08 09 10 >_ EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05 [ ][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ] [ SELECT ]
  • Page 183B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION NOTE 1 “*” cannot be used in item names, because it is used as control code. “[”, “]”, “(“, or “)” also cannot be used in item names. 2 When both alphanumeric and two–byte characters are used in an item name to be registered, the warning message “DATA IS OUT OF
  • Page 1841. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.19.4 The setting screen lets you specify the service life, the remaining service Setting Screen Display time, and count type for a registered item name. It also displays the same count status information as displayed on the and Setting status screen. PERIODICA
  • Page 185B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION (2) Remaining service time The remaining service time of an item (the time allowed before the item is replaced) is determined by count–down and displayed under “Remaining service time.” When the remaining service time decreases to a specified percentage (specifi
  • Page 1861. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 NOTE 1 An attempt to set up the count type for a non–registered item or an item for which the service life has not been set up results in the warning message “EDIT REJECTED”. 2 Soft keys [INPUT] and [+INPUT] are ignored. 3 In leap years, an error of 24 hours occ
  • Page 187B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION a : Service life r : Remaining service time n : Item name [Alphanumeric characters*two–byte characters * alphanumeric characters q : count type 0 = not to count 1 = count at all times 2 = count during power–on time 3 = count during operation 4 = count during cut
  • Page 1881. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 1.19.6 FANUC Two–Byte Character Code Table 158
  • Page 189B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 159
  • Page 1901. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 160
  • Page 191B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 161
  • Page 1921. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63525EN/02 162
  • Page 193B–63525EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 163
  • Page 1942. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2 LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE This chapter describes the printed–circuit board in the i series CNC control unit of LCD–mounted type and the functions of the card PCBs mounted on the printed–circuit board. It also explains how to replace consu
  • Page 1952. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.1 STRUCTURE Control/LCD unit MDI unit Optical cable Servo motor Servo amplifier I/O Link I/O module, I/O unit MODEL–A Machine operator’s panel/ Power magnetic circuit etc. 165
  • Page 1962. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE 2.2.1 Series 16i/160is 166
  • Page 1972. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE Serial communication board Motherboard Remote buffer/DNC1/DNC2 CPU for CNC control ⋅ Power supply Sub–CPU board ⋅ 2–axis to 8–axis control ⋅ Spindle control Sub–CPU for 2–path control ⋅ LCD/MDI interface ⋅ 2–axis to 8–axis control ⋅ I/O Link ⋅ Spind
  • Page 1982. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.2.2 Series 18i/180is Serial communication board Motherboard Remote buffer/DNC1/DNC2 CPU for CNC control ⋅ Power supply Sub–CPU board ⋅ 2–axis to 6–axis control ⋅ Spindle control Sub–CPU for 2–path control ⋅ LCD/MDI interface ⋅ 2–axis to 6–axis con
  • Page 1992. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.2.3 Series 21i/210is Motherboard CPU for controlling CNC ⋅ Power supply ⋅ 2–axis to 4–axis control ⋅ Spindle interface ⋅ LCD/MDI interface ⋅ I/O Link ⋅ PMC–SB7 ⋅ Analog output (option) ⋅ High–speed DI ⋅ RS–232C × 2 Serial communication board ⋅ Mem
  • Page 2002. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 170
  • Page 2012. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE Common to 16i/18i/21i/160is/180is/210is Motherboard LCD display unit 24V–IN(CP1A) 24 VDC power Soft key cable MDI UNIT CK2 MDI(CA55) CK1 R232(JD36A) RS–232C I/O unit R232(JD36B) RS–232C I/O unit { Touch panel Analog output for tool drive A–OUT&HDI(J
  • Page 2022. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 When option boards are provided Serial communication Option slot board Remote buffer board DNC1 board DNC2 board R232-3(JD28A) RS–232C I/O unit (when remote buffer board or DNC2 board is used) R422-1(JD6A) RS–422 I/O unit (when remote buffer board o
  • Page 2032. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE When option boards are provided Circuit breaker Option slot Loader control board 200VAC AC reactor 200VAC MCC Circuit breaker CX1A TB2 CX3 PSM CX4 CX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B TB2 CX2A JX1A COP10B Loader axis 1 FSSB(COP10A) TB2 SVM servo motor COP10A JF1 TB1
  • Page 2042. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 When option boards are provided Option slot I/O link II board (TB1) To other equipment DeviceNet board (TB1) To other equipment PROFIBUS board PROFIBUS adapter unit Master(JN1) JN2 CN1 To other equipment PROFIBUS adapter unit Slave(JN2) JN2 CN1 To o
  • Page 2052. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTORS AND CARDS 2.4.1 FS16i/18i/21i Motherboard D Specification Name Specification Series 16i A20B–8100–0660 Series 18i A20B–8100–0661 Series 21i (without Ethernet function, PMC–SA1) A20B–8100–0662 Ser
  • Page 2062. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Connector mounting location Connector unit Fan motor Fan motor Battery Rear of unit COP10A–1 COP10A–2 (COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.) CA69 JD36A JA40 JA41 CP1 CA55 CD38 CN2 JD36B JD44A Motherboard CN3 CN8 JNA CNM1A Motherboard
  • Page 2072. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE Connector number Application COP10A–1, COP10A–2 Servo amplifier (FSSB) CA55 MDI CA69 Servo check JD36A RS–232C serial port JD36B RS–232C serial port JA40 Analog output/high–speed DI JD44A I/O link JA41 Serial spindle/position coder CP1 24VDC–IN JNA
  • Page 2082. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Card and power supply mounting location Connector Connector Connector (1) Axis control (2) Display (3) CPU card card control card Connector (4) Power supply unit No. Name Specification Function Remarks (1) Axis control card A20B–3300–0033 Axis con
  • Page 2092. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE No. Name Specification Function Remarks (2) Display control A20B–3300–0280 10.4″ color LCD with Graphic software 60V6 series, embedded card graphic function and Ethernet control software series 656A embedded ethernet A20B–3300–0281 8.4″ color LCD wi
  • Page 2102. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D DIMM module mounting location DIMM module socket (1) FROM/SRAM (2) Analog spindle module module DIMM module socket No. Name Specification Function Remarks (1) FROM/SRAM A20B–3900–0160 FROM 16MB Various control software programs are module SRAM 1MB
  • Page 211Axis control card Display control card CPU card B–63525EN/02 SRAM DSP CPU CPU Axis 1/2 D Block diagram G/A DSP control DRAM Axis 3/4 DRAM Axis 5/6 G/A VGA G/A CPU Axis 7/8 Boot peripherals control graphic control ethernet control software FSSBC Local BUS 181 G/A F–BUS PMC control F–BUS control I/O S
  • Page 2122. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED display Rear of unit SRAMP SEMG SVALM SFAIL Alarm (red) LEDG0 LEDG1 LEDG2 LEDG3 Status (green) 182
  • Page 2132. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE (1) Changes in status LED (green) indication at power–on time No. Status LED Status 1 jjjj Power is not supplied. 2 JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on; boot is running. 3 jJJJ System activation started. 4 JjJJ Waiting for eac
  • Page 2142. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.4.2 Inverter PCBs and Connector Units Name Specification Inverter For monochrome LCD A20B–8100–0710 P.C.B For 10.4″ color LCD A20B–8001–0920 For 8.4″ color LCD A20B–8001–0922 Connector For unit with no option slot A15L–0001–0060#B unit For unit wi
  • Page 2152. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE D Connector mounting (1) With 3 or 4 slots location Connector unit Fan motor Fan motor Rear of unit (2) With 2 slots Connector unit Fan motor Fan motor Rear of unit (3) With no slot Connector unit Fan motor Fan motor Battery Rear of unit 185
  • Page 2162. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Connector location (1) Inverter PCB (printed–circuit board) (2) Connector unit for no slot type (3) Connector unit for 2–slot type (4) Connector unit for 3–slot and 4–slot types 186
  • Page 2172. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE Connector number Application CN39A Power supply for fans CN39B CN39C CN39D CP8 Battery CP1 Power supply for LCD backlight CN3 Power supply for inverter PCB 2.4.3 C Board, Serial Communication Board, Symbol CAPi T Board, and PMC–RE Board D Specificat
  • Page 2182. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Connector location (1) PMC–RE board JNA F–BUS backplane connector CP8B JD1A2 JD38B JD38A JD6A (2) C board JNA F–BUS backplane connector (3) Serial communication board A remote buffer/DNC2 JNA F–BUS backplane connector JD28A JD6A 188
  • Page 2192. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE (4) Serial communication board B DNC1 JNA F–BUS backplane connector JD28A JD6A (5) CAP–II board/Symbol CAPi T board JNA F–BUS backplane connector CP8B Connector number Application JD1A2 I/O link JD38B RS–232C serial port JD38A RS–232C serial port JD
  • Page 2202. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Card and DIMM module PMC–RE board locations (1) (2) CPU card DRAM module Connector DIMM module socket Note) The DRAM module is mounted on the CPU card. C language board, serial communication board, Symbol CAPi T board (2) DRAM module DIMM module s
  • Page 221B–63525EN/02 For the A20B–8100–0026x, the functions equivalent CPU card to the CPU card and mounted on an option board. D Block diagram From lithium battery For PMC–RE DIMM module For symbol CAPi T DRAM and PMC–RE G/A CPU G/A G/A peripheral I/O link control PMC control 191 G/A BUS conversion F–BUS L
  • Page 2222. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED indication Status (green) Alarm (red) Alarm LED (red) indication at system alarm occurrence Alarm: 1 2 3 Cause jjj Usual operation under way Jjj Bus error (L–bus alarm) jJj Bus error or DRAM parity (L–bus EMG) JJj Reset under way jjJ I/O link
  • Page 2232. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.4.4 Sub–CPU Board D Specification Name7 Specification Sub–CPU board A20B–8002–0190 NOTE The sub–CPU board cannot fit into any of the following slots. · Center slot of a unit with 3 option slots · Option slot farthest from the LCD in a unit with 4
  • Page 2242. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Card and DIMM module locations Connector (2) CPU card (1) Axis control Connector card The DRAM module is mounted on the CPU card. No. Name Specification Function Remarks (1) Axis control card A20B–3300–0243 Axis control 2 axes Applicable servo sof
  • Page 225B–63525EN/02 Servo card CPU card D Block diagram Axis 1/2 G/A DSP control DRAM Axis 3/4 Axis 5/6 G/A CPU Axis 7/8 peripheral 195 Local BUS G/A G/A F–BUS BUS conversion peripheral (To back panel) control Sub–CPU board 2. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES FSSB Serial spindle (to servo amplifier) Analog output
  • Page 2262. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED indication Status (green) Alarm (red) (1) Changes in status LED (green) indication at power–on time Status LED No. Status (LED1, 2) 1 jj Power is not supplied. 2 JJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on; the sub–CPU has not sta
  • Page 2272. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.4.5 RISC Board D Specification Name Specification RISC board A20B–8100–0170 NOTE The RISC board cannot fit into any of the following slots. · Center slot of a unit with 3 option slots · Option slot farthest from the LCD in a unit with 4 option slo
  • Page 2282. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED indication Alarm (red) Status (green) ALM7 ALM6 ALM5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 (1) Status LED (green) indication (LED lighting) Alarm LED Status (LED4 to LED1) jjjj Power is not supplied. Jjjj CNC wait (1) (Check the CNC for the cause.) Module ID er
  • Page 2292. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE (2) Status LED (green) indication (LED blinking) Alarm LED Status (LED4 to LED1) Ljjj Command execution in progress (reset) jLLj Command execution in progress (pre–processing, distribution) jjjL Command wait jLjL NC statement input wait LLjL Command
  • Page 2302. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.4.6 Data Server Board D Specification Name Specification Data server board A20B–8100–0271 (ATA card version) Add–on board A20B–2002–0960 NOTE The data server board (ATA card version) cannot fit into any of the following slots. · Option slot neares
  • Page 2312. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE D LED indication JNA F–BUS backplane connector LED detail diagram 201
  • Page 2322. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 LED indication transition at power–on time LED indication No. Ethernet board status 1234 1 STATUS jjjj Power off. 2 STATUS JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on. 3 STATUS jJJJ MPU initialization completed. 4 STATUS jjJJ Firmware
  • Page 2332. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE LED indication (STATUS) at error occurrence The STATUS LEDs repeat LONG and SHORT patterns. The LONG and SHORT patterns correspond to long and short lighting intervals, respectively. STATUS LED indication No. Ethernet/data server board state LONG SH
  • Page 2342. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.4.7 Loader Control Board D Specification Name Specification Loader control board A20B–8100–0830 NOTE The loader control board cannot fit into any of the following slots. · Center slot of a unit with 3 option slots · Option slot farthest from the L
  • Page 2352. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE D Card mounting location (1) (2) Axis control card CPU card JNA Connector Connector JD1A No. Name Specification Function Remarks (1) Axis control card A20B–3300–0033 Axis control 2 axes Applicable servo software: Series 9090 A20B–3300–0032 Axis cont
  • Page 236Servo card CPU card 2. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES Axis 1/2 G/A D Block diagram DSP control DRAM Axis 3/4 HARDWARE G/A CPU peripheral 206 Local BUS G/A PMC control F–BUS F–BUS (To back panel) conversion G/A peripheral control Loader control board From lithium battery FSSB (to servo amplifier) I/O Link
  • Page 2372. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE D LED indication Alarm (red) Status (green) (1) Changes in status LED (green) indication at power–on time Status LED No. Status (LED1 to 4) 1 jjjj Power is not supplied. 2 JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on; the loader CPU ha
  • Page 2382. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 (2) Alarm LED (red) indication at system alarm occurrence When any of these alarm LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is defective. Alarm LED Meaning ALM1 SRAM parity alarm. ALM2 Servo alarm. ALM3 Lights when a system alarm occurs. Used by t
  • Page 2392. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE D LED indication Status (green) Alarm (red) (1) Changes in status LED (green) indication at power–on time Status LED No. Status (ST4 to 1) 1 jjjj Power is not supplied. 2 JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on. 3 JJJj HSSB board
  • Page 2402. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 (3) Alarm LED (red) indication at error occurrence Alarm LED Meaning AL1 HSSB communication was discontinued. AL2 Parity alarm in NC/PC common RAM. D Rotary switch (SW1) setting SW1 Rotary switch setting when the PC or PANEL i is connected By changi
  • Page 2412. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.4.9 I/O Link–II Board Name Specification FANUC I/O Link–II board A20B–8100–0250 D Connector location JNA F–BUS backplane connector Connector number Application TB1 Terminal board for FANUC I/O Link–II interface D Card location No card is mounted o
  • Page 2422. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 (1) Hardware control LEDs LED No. Meaning LED5 Lights when the CPU on the FANUC I/O Link–II board is run- ning. When the LED is off, it means that the CPU has been reset. LED6 Lights when a DRAM parity error is detected. It is likely that the hardwa
  • Page 2432. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.4.10 PROFIBUS Board Name Specification PROFIBUS board (master function) A20B–8100–0430 Add–on board (slave function) A20B–2100–0430 NOTE The PROFIBUS board cannot fit into any of the following slots. · Center slot of a unit with 3 option slots · O
  • Page 2442. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED indication JNA F–BUS backplane connector ADD–ON board LEDs for slave function LEDs for master function LED1 (green) LEDB (red) LEDB (red) LED2 (green) LED2 (green) LED3 (green) LED1 (green) (1) LEDs for master function LED No. Meaning (abbrevi
  • Page 2452. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.4.11 Ethernet Board Name Specification Ethernet board A20B–8100–0271 NOTE The Ethernet board cannot fit into the option slot nearest to the LCD. D Connector location JNA F–BUS backplane connector Connector number Application CD38 10BASE–T Ethernet
  • Page 2462. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED indication JNA F–BUS backplane connector Detailed LED diagram 216
  • Page 2472. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE LED indication transition at power–on time LED indication No. Ethernet board status 1234 1 STATUS jjjj Power off 2 STATUS JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on. 3 STATUS jJJJ MPU initialization completed. 4 STATUS jjJJ Firmware
  • Page 2482. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 LED indication (STATUS) at error occurrence The STATUS LEDs repeat LONG and SHORT patterns. The LONG and SHORT patterns correspond to long and short lighting intervals, respectively. STATUS LED indication No. Ethernet/data server board state LONG SH
  • Page 2492. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.4.12 DeviceNet Interface Board Name Specification DeviceNet interface board A20B–8001–0880 NOTE The DeviceNet board cannot fit into the center option slot of a unit with 3 option slots D Connector mounting location JNA F–BUS backplane connector Co
  • Page 2502. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED display Daughter board HEALTH NS LEDA LED3 LED2 LED1 LED0 NS and HEALTH are mounted on the back of the daughter board. LED indication Name Color Description LED0 to 3 Green No special meaning LEDA Red This LED glows when something unusual occu
  • Page 2512. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 2.5.1 Basic Unit Model Name Drawing number Remarks 16i Basic Unit (No slot) A02B–0281–B500 Basic Unit (2 slots) A02B–0281–B502 Basic Unit (3 slots) A02B–0281–B503 Basic Unit (4 slots) A02B–0281–B504 18i B
  • Page 2522. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.5.3 MDI Unit Model Name Drawing number Remarks All models T series/English/Small keyboard A02B–0281–C120#TBR Horizontal type, 200 140mm T series/English/Standard keyboard A02B–0281–C121#TBR Vertical/horizontal type, 200 260mm T series/English/Stan
  • Page 2532. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.5.4 Printed Circuit Boards Name Drawing number ID Remarks Motherboard for 16i A20B–8100–0660 3x08 Motherboard for 18i A20B–8100–0661 3x09 Motherboard for 21i A20B–8100–0662 0x0A (without Ethernet function, PMC–SA1) Motherboard for 21i A20B–8100–06
  • Page 2542. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Name Drawing number ID Remarks Display control card A20B–3300–0283 00 (7.2″ monochrome LCD, graphic function, embedded Ethernet function) Display control card A20B–3300–0300 07 (9.5″ monochrome LCD, embedded Ethernet function) Display control card A
  • Page 2552. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE Name Drawing number ID Remarks FROM/SRAM module A20B–3900–0163 FROM: C2 (FROM 32MB, SRAM 1MB) SRAM: 03 FROM/SRAM module A20B–3900–0164 FROM: C2 (FROM 32MB, SRAM 2MB) SRAM: 04 FROM/SRAM module A20B–3900–0165 FROM: C2 (FROM 32MB, SRAM 3MB) SRAM: 05 FR
  • Page 2562. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Name Drawing number ID Remarks Inverter A20B–8100–0710 – (for 9.5″ /7.2″ monochrome LCD) Inverter A20B–8001–0920 – (for 10.4″ color LCD) Inverter A20B–8001–0922 – (for 8.4″ color LCD) PC–side HSSB interface board A20B–8001–0582 – (2CH, applicable to
  • Page 2572. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.5.5 I/O Name Drawing number Remarks Distributed I/O connector panel I/O module A1 A20B–2002–0470 DI/DO= 72/56 DI=general 16, matrix 56, with MPG interface Distributed I/O connector panel I/O module B1 A20B–2002–0520 DI/DO=48/32, with MPG interface
  • Page 2582. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.5.6 Other Units Name Drawing number Remarks Separate detector interface unit (basic 4 axes) A02B–0236–C205 Separate detector interface unit (additional 4 axes) A02B–0236–C204 Spindle distributed adapter A13B–0180–B001 I/O Link distributed adapter
  • Page 2592. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.6 REPLACING THE WARNING MOTHERBOARD Only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this replacement work. When opening the cabinet and replacing the board, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circu
  • Page 2602. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2) Remove the cables from connectors CNM1A (PCMCIA interface connector), CN8 (video signal interface connector) and CN2 (soft key connector) on the motherboard. Then, unscrew the screws fastening the motherboard. The connector CN3 (inverter connecto
  • Page 2612. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.7 REPLACING FUSE WARNING ON CONTROL UNIT Before replacing a blown fuse, locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this replacement wo
  • Page 2622. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.8 Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is backed REPLACING up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The BATTERY above data is n
  • Page 2632. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE Battery case Connector Lithium battery A02B–0200–K102 WARNING Using other than the recommended battery may result in the battery exploding. Replace the battery only with the specified battery (A02B–0200–K102). CAUTION Steps 1) to 3) should be comple
  • Page 2642. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 When using commercial alkaline dry cells (size D) D Method of connection Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector to which the lithium battery is connected. The lithium battery, provided as standard, can be replaced with e
  • Page 2652. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE Replacing 1) Prepare two alkaline dry cells (size D) commercially available. commercial alkaline dry 2) Turn on the power to the control unit. cells (size D) 3) Remove the battery case cover. 4) Replace the cells, paying careful attention to their o
  • Page 2662. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2.9 REPLACING FAN WARNING MOTORS When opening the cabinet and replacing a fan motor, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely d
  • Page 2672. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE Replacement procedure D For units with no 1. Before replacing a fan motor, turn off the power to the CNC. expansion slots and units with 2 expansion 2. Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ( (1) of Fig. a). slots The connector is latch
  • Page 2682. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D For units with 3 or 4 1. Before replacing a fan motor, turn off the power to the CNC. expansion slots 2. Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ( (1) of Fig. b). The connector is latched. So, when unplugging the connector, hold down th
  • Page 2692. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.10 REPLACING LCD WARNING BACKLIGHT Only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this replacement work. When opening the cabinet and replacing a unit, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
  • Page 2702. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Replacement procedure 1) Detach the flat cable for soft keys, then detach the escutcheon from the CNC. Escutcheon Flat cable for soft keys 2) As shown below, unplug the connectors CP1 and CN8 to detach the LCD unit from the CNC unit. LCD unit CP1
  • Page 2712. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 3)–1 For the 7.2″ LCD units (monochrome) manufactured by Hitachi Remove the three brackets from the left part on the front of the LCD unit, and remove the cover. Then, the backlight is exposed. Replace the backlight with a new one. Connector Bracket
  • Page 2722. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 3)–3 For the 8.4″ LCD (color) As shown below, remove two bolts, remove the backlight case by pulling it down and sliding it slightly to the left, then replace the backlight. LCD unit rear view Bolt Backlight 3)–4 For the 9.5″ LCD units (monochrome)
  • Page 2732. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES B–63525EN/02 HARDWARE 2.11 HEAT GENERATED IN Amount of Unit generated Remarks EACH UNIT heat Control unit No option slot 33W (NOTE 1) 2 option slots 37W 3 option slots 39W 4 option slots 40W Option boards HSSB board 3W Sub–CPU board 13W Loader control board 10W PMC C boa
  • Page 2742. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 NOTE 1 The amount of heat generated in the LCD and MDI units is included, but that in each option board is not. 2 The amount of heat generated in the ISA expansion board varies from one model to another. Add the amount of heat generated in the ISA b
  • Page 275B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE 3 LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE This chapter describes the LCD–mounted type FS160is/180is/210is hardware. See Chapter 4 ”STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE,” for stand–alone type 160is/180is/210is hardware. 3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . .
  • Page 2763. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 3.1 See section 2.1 for hardware configuration of 160is/180is/210is. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 3.2 See section 2.2 for hardware overview of 160is/180is/210is. HARDWARE OVERVIEW 3.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS For the 160is/180is/210is, the following con
  • Page 277B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE 3.4 FS160is/180is/210is MOTHERBOARD D Specifications Item Code Series 160is motherboard A20B–8100–0790 Series 180is motherboard A20B–8100–0791 Series 210is motherboard (PMC–SA1) A20B–8100–0794 Series 210is motherboard (PMC–SB7) A20B–8100–0795 247
  • Page 2783. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Mounting positions of connectors Connector unit Fan motor Fan motor Battery Rear of unit COP10A–1 COP10A–2 (COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.) JD36A JA40 JA41 JD36B JD44A CP1 CA69 CN2 CD38S CA55 CD38A CA75 Motherboard CN8 CN3 JNA
  • Page 279B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE Connector number Use JD48 PC side RS232C, USB COP10A–1, COP10A–2 Servo motor (FSSB) CA55 MDI CA69 Servo check JD36A RS232C serial port JD36B RS232C serial port JA40 Analog output/High–speed DI JD44A I/O Link JA41 Serial spindle/Position coder CP1 D
  • Page 2803. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Mounting positions of cards (1) (2) (3) Axis control card CE card CPU card Connector Connector Connector DIMM module DIMM module Connector (4) Power supply unit No. Name Code Function Remarks (1) Axis control card A20B–3300–0033 Axis control 2–ax
  • Page 281B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE No. Name Code Function Remarks (3) CPU card A20B–3300–0310 For Series 160is/ 180is DRAM 16MB A20B–3300–0311 For Series 160is/ 180is DRAM 32MB A20B–3300–0291 For Series 210is DRAM 16MB A20B–3300–0290 For Series 210is DRAM 32MB A20B–3300–0312 For Ser
  • Page 2823. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Mounting positions of DIMM module (1) FROM/SRAM module DIMM module (2) Analog spindle module Connector Connector Connector DIMM module Connector Motherboard No. Name Code Function Remarks (1) FROM/SRAM A20B–3900–0160 FROM 16MB FROM contains vario
  • Page 283B–63525EN/02 Axis control card CE card 2 CPU card SRAM DSP CPU CPU D Block diagram Axis 1/2 G/A DSP BOOT control DRAM software DRAM Axis 3/4 CE card 1 Axis 5/6 Compact CPU flash card peripherals G/A CPU BOOT peripherals Axis 7/8 software FSSBC G/A 253 bus conversion Local BUS G/A F–BUS PMC control I
  • Page 2843. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED display Rear of unit LED LINK Indicates the link state of the Ethernet on the NC side. This LED lights when a link is established. PC Status (Green) D2 Flashes while data is being POWER sent or received over the Ethernet on the PC side. SYSFA
  • Page 285B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE (1) Changes in status LED (green) indication at power–on time (NC side status : Green LED) No. Status LED Status 1.2.3.4 1 jjjj Power is not supplied. 2 JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on; boot is running. 3 jJJJ System acti
  • Page 2863. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 (3) Alarm LED (red) indication at system alarm occurrence If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is defective. Alarm LED Meaning SVALM Servo alarm SYSEMG Lights when a system alarm occurs. The hardware has detected a fail- ure
  • Page 287B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE Mounting position of rotary switch (LCD–mounted type CNC) Rear of unit Rotary switch D Short plug settings Mother board TMIL1 (short) Be sure to insert these short plugs. RESERVE (open) Be sure to remove these short plugs. (For some boards, the pin
  • Page 2883. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 3.5 The CE card has a different configuration from other card printed–circuit boards. CE CARD CE cards 1 and 2 are combined and the compact flash card is attached. D CE card configuration CE card 1 CE card 2 Spacer Compact flash card ÕÕ Connector Õ
  • Page 289B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE 3.6 INSTALLING AND REMOVING OPTIONAL BOARDS 3.6.1 Installing and Removing the Mother WARNING Board Only those personnel who were well trained for maintenance and safety can perform the replacement. When removing the board with the cabinet open, be
  • Page 2903. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 (2) Loosen the three screws that retain the power supply unit and remove the unit. Then disconnect the cables from PCMCIA2 (PCMCIA interface connector), CN8 (video signal interface connector), and CN2 (soft key connector) located on the mother boar
  • Page 291B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE 3.6.2 Installing and Removing the CE Card D Removing the CE card CE card Mother board Remove the CE cards from the mother board. (Remove these cards from the plug connector on the mother board with CE card 1 and CE card 2 engaged.) D Removing the c
  • Page 2923. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Separating CE card 1 S On side A, CE card 2 is installed. Press both sides of the latch section from CE card 2 of each spacer engaging CE cards 1 and 2 to unlock the latch, then remove CE card 1. CE card 2 (side A) ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ Spacer ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ Rem
  • Page 293B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE D Attaching the spacers On side B (on which the connector for combining the mother board is (spacer specification: mounted), insert a spacer into a spacer hole. A98L–0005–0208) Press the spacer until the latch on side A is completely open. D Instal
  • Page 2943. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 3.7 Printed circuit boards LIST OF UNITS AND Name Drawing number PRINTED CIRCUIT Motherboard 160is A20B–8100–0790 BOARDS 180is A20B–8100–0791 210is (SA1) A20B–8100–0794 210is (SB7) A20B–8100–0795 CE card CE card 1 A20B–3300–0330 CE card 2 A20B–3300
  • Page 295B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE 3.8 REPLACING THE WARNING FUSE ON THE UNITS Before replacing the fuse, eliminate the cause by which the fuse blew. Therefore, only those personnel who were well trained for maintenance and safety can perform the replacement. When replacing the fuse
  • Page 2963. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 3.9 See Section 2.8, ”REPLACING THE BATTERY” for replacing the battery. REPLACING THE BATTERY 3.10 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR D Ordering number of fan motor Unit Number of Ordering number Required extension slot number LCD–mounted No extension slot A0
  • Page 297B–63525EN/02 3. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE 3.11 LCD back–light can not be replaced for LCD–mounted type is series CNC. REPLACING THE LCD BACK–LIGHT 3.12 For the LCD display unit with a touch panel, the surface of the touch panel is covered with the protection sheet to protect it. When there
  • Page 2983. LCD–MOUNTED TYPE is SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 3.13 BACKUP UNIT D Specifications Item Ordering number Backup unit PCB A20B–2100–0820 Backup unit cable A02B–0281–K801 D Mounting positions of connectors CN9 Backup unit PCB Front view Connector name Function CN9 Supplying the backup power (main pr
  • Page 299B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4 STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE This chapter describes the printed circuit boards of the CNC control unit of the stand–alone type i series and card PCB functions on the printed circuit boards. The chapter also describes procedures for replacing
  • Page 3004. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION LCD unit MDI unit Control unit Servo amplifier module/ Servo motor/ spindle amplifier module spindle motor Distributed I/O module, I/O unit MODEL–A, etc. I/O Link Machine operator’s panel, power magnetic circuit, etc. 270
  • Page 301B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW 4.2.1 Series 16i/160i/160is 271
  • Page 3024. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Sub–CPU board(*2) Main CPU board Sub–CPU for two–path control ⋅ 2–axis to 8–axis control CPU for controlling CNC ⋅ Spindle interface ⋅ Power ⋅ Analog output ⋅ 2–axis to 8–axis control ⋅ Spindle interface ⋅ I/O Link RISC board (M series only)(*1) ⋅ P
  • Page 303B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.2.2 Series 18i/180i/180is Sub–CPU board(*2) Main CPU board Sub–CPU for two–path control ⋅ 2–axis to 6–axis control CPU for controlling CNC ⋅ Spindle interface ⋅ Power ⋅ Analog output ⋅ 2–axis to 6–axis control ⋅ Spindle interface ⋅ I/O Link RISC b
  • Page 3044. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.2.3 Series 21i/210i/210is Main CPU board CPU for controlling CNC ⋅ Power ⋅ 2–axis to 4–axis control ⋅ Spindle interface ⋅ I/O Link ⋅ PMC–SA1/SB7 ⋅ Analog output (option) ⋅ High–speed DI ⋅ RS–232C x 2 ⋅ Memory card interface ⋅ Display interface ⋅ E
  • Page 305B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 275
  • Page 3064. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Stand–alone type control unit Main board Slot 1 24V–IN(CP1) 24–VDC power 24V–OUT(CP2) To I/O unit, etc. Optical fiber cable LCD UNIT MDUNIT LCD(COP20A) COP20B CK2 24VDC CP1A CA55 CK1 CP1B Memory card (Touch panel) R232–1(JD5A) RS–232–C I/O unit R232
  • Page 307B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE Stand–alone type control unit Slot 2 Data server board (cannot be used in 21i/210i/210is) ATA card (CD38M) Ethernet Slot 3 Sub–CPU board (cannot be used in 21i/210i/210is) A–OUT(JA40) Analog output for tool drive Position coder SPDL&POS(JA41) { PSM
  • Page 3084. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 When an option board is used I/O Link II board Mini slot To another unit DeviceNet board Mini slot To another unit PROFIBUS board Mini slot (master) To another unit PROFIBUS board Mini slot (slave) To another unit FL–net board Mini slot To another u
  • Page 309B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE For the is series CNC display unit, the additional connection shown below is required on the unit. DC24V–IN(CP1) 24VDC Power Supply MDI unit dedicated to PCs Soft Key Cable Soft Key(CK2) Backup(CA75) Backup Unit PC Side Ethernet Hub, etc. (CD38S) PC
  • Page 3104. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.4 CONNECTOR AND CARD CONFIGURATIONS OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 4.4.1 Main CPU Board of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/ 180i/210i/160is/180is/ 210is D Specifications Item Code Main CPU board of Series 16i/160i/160is A16B–3200–0420 Main CPU board of Series
  • Page 311B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc. MAIN Battery case BAT1: Battery LEDs JD5A: RS232C serial port JD5B: RS232C serial port CNM1B: Memory card JD1A: I/O Link JA40: Analog output/high–speed DI JA41: Serial spindle/position coder JD45: CRT L
  • Page 3124. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Mounting positions of cards and DIMM modules (4) Power supply unit (1) CPU card (5) Analog spindle module (2) Display control card (3) Axis control card (6) FROM/SRAM module 282
  • Page 313B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE No. Item Code Function Remarks (1) CPU card A20B–3300–0310 DRAM 16MB For Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/ 160is/180is A20B–3300–0311 DRAM 32MB For Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/ 160is/180is A20B–3300–0291 DRAM 16MB For Series 21i/210i/210is A20B–3300–0290 DRAM
  • Page 3144. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 No. Item Code Function Remarks (4) Power unit A20B–8100–0851 (5) Analog spindle A20B–3900–0170 Analog spindle position coder module (6) FROM/SRAM A20B–3900–0160 FROM 16MB FROM stores various control module SRAM 1MB software products. SRAM is backed
  • Page 315B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D LED display D Fuse burn–out detection LED FUSE (Red) Lit if the fuse is blown. D LED status transition at power–up j: Off J: On 7–segment STATUS Status LED Not lit jjjj Power off 8 JJJJ CPU not activated after power–up F NC system loading started
  • Page 3164. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED display when a system alarm occurs j: Off J: On l: Blink (if CPU card A20B–3300–031X is used) ALARM jJj System failure. The software detected an error and stopped the system. ALARM JJj An error occurred on the local bus in the main CPU board.
  • Page 317B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D 7–segment LED display when a system alarm occurs If a system alarm occurs, a number blinks as shown below, depending on the system alarm number. System 7–segment alarm num- System alarm type LED ber 0 900 to 909 ROM parity alarm. System ROM parity
  • Page 3184. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Block diagram DRAM Analog output Position coder FROM SRAM 288
  • Page 319B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.4.2 Sub–CPU Board D Specifications Item Code Sub–CPU board A16B–2203–0751 D Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc. LED display JA40–2: Analog output JA41–2: Serial spindle/position coder COP10A–2: FSSB2 CA69B: Servo check COP10A–1: FSSB2 289
  • Page 3204. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Mounting positions of cards and DIMM module (1) CPU card (2) Axis control card No. Item Code Function Remarks (1) CPU card A20B–3300–0310 DRAM 16MB A20B–3300–0311 DRAM 32MB (2) Axis control card A20B–3300–0243 Axis control 2 axes Servo software Se
  • Page 321B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D LED display D LED display at power–up j: Off J: On STATUS jjjj Power off STATUS JJJj CPU not activated after power–up STATUS Jjjj Initialization completed, normal operation in progress D LED display when a system alarm occurs j: Off J: On l: Blink
  • Page 322Servo card CPU card D Block diagram Axis 1/2 G/A DSP control DRAM Axis 3/4 Axis 5/6 G/A CPU 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE Axis 7/8 peripherals 292 Local BUS G/A G/A F–BUS Bus Peripheral (to back panel) conversion control Sub–CPU board FSSB Serial spindle (to servo amplifier) Analog output Ca
  • Page 323B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.4.3 The RISC function and data server function are provided on a single RISC Board, Data option board. If the RISC function alone is needed, a RISC board is used. If just the data server function is needed, a data server board is used. If Server B
  • Page 3244. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Mounting position of card (For RISC card, RISC+DATA SERVER board) (1) CPU card No. Item Code Function Remarks (1) CPU card A20B–3300–0102 Standard type 294
  • Page 325B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D LED display of the RISC The RISC function uses the green STATUS LEDs and red ALARM LEDs function in the upper part of the face plate. The red ALARM LEDs are used also by the data server function. <1> Status LED indication (green LED turned on) Ala
  • Page 3264. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 <3> Alarm LED indication (red LED) Alarm LED State JjJ The power supply for the processor core on the RISC board is de- fective. jjJ A DRAM parity error occurred on the CPU card. JJj System emergency jJj (Reserved) J : ON j : OFF NOTE The LEDs displ
  • Page 327B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE LED status transition at power–up LED statuses f: Off F: On l: Blink Z: Don’t care LED display No. Board status (L1 to L4) 1 ff Power off ff 2 FF Initial state immediately after power–up FF 3 fF MPU initialization completed FF 4 fF Firmware download
  • Page 3284. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 NOTE If an error, indicated by repeatedly flashing a LONG and SHORT combination other than the above, occurs, contact FANUC. LED display when an error occurs (ALARM) LED statuses j: Off J: On LED display No. Board status 123 1 jJJ An MPU transfer er
  • Page 329B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.4.4 Loader Control Board D Specification Name Specification Loader Control Board A16B–2203–0740 D Connector location LED display JD1A : FANUC I/O LINK CNBK : Brake drive output CNPW : Emergency stop control LED display for I/O alarm CRM1 : DI/DO f
  • Page 3304. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Card location (1) CPU card (2) Axis control card No. Item Code Function Remarks (1) CPU card A20B–3300–0291 CNC control A20B–3300–0032 4 axes (2) Axis control card Axis control A20B–3300–0033 2 axes 300
  • Page 331B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE – LED Display Transition at Power–up NO. LED display NC Status 1 STATUS:jjjj Power off 2 STATUS:JJJJ Startup status immediately after power is turned on 3 STATUS:jJJJ RAM initialized 4 STATUS:JjJJ Software ID set; keys initialized 5 STATUS:jjJJ Wait
  • Page 3324. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.4.5 C Board, Serial Communication Board D Specifications Item Code C board A20B–8100–0330 Serial communication board R.B./DNC2: RS232C I/F A20B–8100–0334 R.B./DNC2: RS422 I/F A20B–8100–0335 DNC1: RS485 I/F A20B–8100–0336 D Mounting positions of co
  • Page 333B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D Mounting positions of card and DIMM module (1) DRAM module No. Item Code Function Remarks (1) DRAM module A20B–3900–0042 System RAM 4MB 4.4.6 HSSB Interface Board D Specifications Item Code HSSB interface board A20B–8001–0730 D Mounting positions
  • Page 3344. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED display LEDB Red HSSB communication has been interrupted. LEDA Red A RAM parity alarm occurred in the common RAM on the board. The common RAM is mounted on this board. The RAM is used to exchange information between the CNC and personal comput
  • Page 335B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D Rotary switch 1) Setting of ROTARY SWITCH in case of connecting to PC or PANEL i The power–on start sequence can be modified using rotary switch on the board. setting of rotary Description switch 0 Setting for maintenance. The start menu is displa
  • Page 3364. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 2) Setting of ROTARY SWITCH in case of connecting to CNC display unit with PC functions The power–on start sequence can be modified using rotary switch on the board and short terminal (SW5) on CNC display unit with PC functions. setting of short Des
  • Page 337B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.4.7 Symbol CAPi T Board D Specifications Item Code Symbol CAPi T board A20B–8100–0560 D Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc. JNA F–BUS backplane connector Setting pin TM1 Connector CP8B D LED display Status display of the red LEDs j: Off J
  • Page 3384. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Setting pin TM1 and Setting pin TM1 and connector CP8B are provided for testing at FANUC. connector CP8B The setting of the pin must not be changed. D Mounting positions of card and DIMM module (1) DRAM module No. Item Code Function Remarks (1) DR
  • Page 339B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D LED display D Status LED display (green) Status LED1 Lit when the board is released from the reset state and starts operating. LED2 Lit when communication starts. This LED is left on until a reset occurs. LED3 Lit each time transmission is perform
  • Page 3404. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc. JNA F–BUS backplane connector CD38L: Ethernet interface D LED display D Status transition at power–up, displayed by the green LEDs No. 4321 Ethernet board status 1 jjjj Power off 2 JJJJ Initial state im
  • Page 341B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D Status LED display when an error occurs (green) The status LEDs alternately display the LONG and SHORT patterns. The LONG pattern is held longer than the SHORT pattern. STATUS LED indication No. Ethernet/data server board state LONG SHORT 4321 432
  • Page 3424. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc. JNA F–BUS backplane connector Daughter board (other manufacturer) TM1 TBL: DeviceNet interface Master/slave setting pin D LED display D Meaning of red LED LEDA Lit when an error occurs on the daughter b
  • Page 343B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.4.11 PROFIBUS Master Board D Specifications Item Code PROFIBUS master board A20B–8100–0470 D Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc. JNA F–BUS backplane connector CN1: PROFIBUS interface D LED display D Status LED display (green) State LED1 L
  • Page 3444. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.4.12 PROFIBUS Slave Board D Specifications Item Code PROFIBUS slave board A20B–8100–0440 D Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc. JNA F–BUS backplane connector CN2: PROFIBUS interface D LED display D Status LED display (green) State LED1 Lit
  • Page 345B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.4.13 FL–net Board D Specifications Item Code FL–net board A20B–8100–0530 D Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc. JNA F–BUS backplane connector Setting pin TM1 (fixed to B) CD38N: FL–net interface D LED display D Meanings of red LEDs HER Lit
  • Page 3464. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.4.14 Main CPU Board of CNC Display Unit with PC Functions and PANEL i D Specifications Item Code Main CPU board For Windows95 For 10.4”/12.1” LCD A20B–2100–0690 (For basic unit A08B–0082–B001 to –B004, –B011 to –B014, –B021 to –B024) For 15.0” LCD
  • Page 347B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D Specifications Item Code Main CPU board For Windows95 For 10.4” LCD A20B–2100–0780 (For basic unit A08B–0082–B031 to –B038, –B041 to –B048, –B051 to –B057) For 12.1” LCD A20B–2100–0781 (For basic unit A13B–0193– B031 to –B038, –B041 to –B048, –B05
  • Page 3484. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED display GR1(Green) +5V(Green) GR2(Green) HDD(Green) GR3(Green) CNC(Green) CNH3 (HDD Signal) COP7 GR4(Green) or CRD(Green) RE1(Red) *6 BUS(Red) RE2(Red) BAT (Red) CD34 (FDD Signal) RE3(Red) FAN(Red) RE4(Red) TRM(Red) Name 1(*6) Name 2(*6) Color
  • Page 349B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.4.15 Mother Board of CNC Item Code Display Unit for is Mother Board of CNC display unit for is series A20B–8100–0800 Series D Mounting positions of connectors Connector unit Fan motor Fan motor Rear of unit JD48 COP7 CP1 CK2 CD38S CN2 CA75 Motherb
  • Page 3504. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Connector number Use JD48 PC side RS232C,USB COP7 High–speed optical communication(HSSB) CN2,CK2 Soft key CP1 DC24V–IN CD38S PC side Ethernet(10BASE–T/100BASE–TX) TP1 Touch panel CA75 Backup unit CN8 Video signal interface PCMCIA2 PCMCIA interface D
  • Page 351B–63525EN/02 CE card 2 D Block diagram CPU BOOT DRAM software CE card 1 Compact CPU flash card peripherals 321 G/A bus conversion HSSBC Ethernet control Power supply unit 5V, 3.3V Ethernet HSSB 24VDC To NC Memory card interface RS–232–C USB 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE
  • Page 3524. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D LED display Rear of unit Lights when the unit failed to Alarm (Red) LED1 communicate with the NC over LEDP the HSSB. Lights when the CE card is Lights when the unit communicates LED2 powered on (including during with the NC over the HSSB. backup o
  • Page 353B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE D Short plug settings Mother board These short plugs are reserved. Be sure to remove them. 323
  • Page 3544. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.5 UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 4.5.1 Basic Units Type Item Drawing No. Remarks 16i/160i/ Basic unit with 1 slot A02B–0281–B801 160is Basic unit with 3 slots A02B–0281–B803 18i/180i/ Basic unit with 1 slot A02B–0283–B801 180is A02B–0297–B801 Fo
  • Page 355B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE Type Item Drawing No. ID Remarks Card PCB Display control card LCD/MDI A20B–3300–0340 – For CRT LINK A20B–3300–0360 – MDI only A20B–3300–0362 – No display A20B–3300–0364 – LCD/MDI A20B–3300–0341 – 21i/210i/210is When the embedded For CRT LINK A20B–3
  • Page 3564. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Type Item Drawing No. ID Remarks DIMM FROM/SRAM module A20B–3900–0160 FROM: C1 FROM 16MB, SRAM module SRAM: 03 1MB A20B–3900–0161 FROM: C1 FROM 16MB, SRAM SRAM: 04 2MB A20B–3900–0162 FROM: C1 FROM 16MB, SRAM SRAM: 05 3MB A20B–3900–0163 FROM: C2 FROM
  • Page 357B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE Type Item Drawing No. ID Remarks Option Sub–CPU board A16B–2203–0751 1xC0 PCB Loader control board A16B–2203–0740 1x97 RISC + data server board A16B–3200–0390 0x81 3xF5 RISC board A16B–3200–0391 0x81 Data server board A16B–3200–0352 3xF5 ATA card ad
  • Page 3584. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Type Item Drawing No. ID Remarks Distributed Operator’s panel I/O module A20B–2002–0470 – Matrix DI supported I/O With MPG interface A20B–2002–0520 – General–purpose DI input With MPG interface A20B–2002–0521 – General–purpose DI input Without MPG i
  • Page 359B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.5.3 LCD/MDI Unit Item Drawing No. Remarks 9.5″ monochrome LCD unit A02B–0281–C061 9.5″ monochrome LCD unit A02B–0281–C066 Character only 10.4″ color LCD unit A02B–0281–C071 10.4″ color LCD unit A02B–0281–C081 With touch panel For display link 7.2″
  • Page 3604. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Item Drawing No. Remarks CAPi T keyboard (horizontal type) A02B–0281–C125#TFBR Alphabetic keys 220x230mm A02B–0281–C125#TFBS Symbolic keys CAPi T keyboard (vertical type) A02B–0281–C126#TFBR Alphabetic keys 220x290mm A02B–0281–C126#TFBS Symbolic key
  • Page 361B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.5.5 CNC Display Unit with PC Functions and PANEL i Type Item Drawing No. Printed circuit board Main printed circuit board For Windows95 For 10.4”/12.1” LCD A20B–2100–0690 for CNC display unit (For basic unit A08B–0082–B001 to –B004, with PC functi
  • Page 3624. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Drawing number Main drawing Type Item of unit for number maintenance (Basic unit) Printed circuit board Base unit LCD Soft key Touch panel for CNC display unit 10.4” LCD A08B–0082–D001 A08B–0082–B001 with PC functions and PANEL i Ę A08B–0082–D002 A0
  • Page 363B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE Ę: Provided : None NOTE The base unit for maintenance consists of the components of the basic unit from which the main printed circuit board and its retaining screws are excluded. Drawing number Main drawing Type Item for maintenance number Printed
  • Page 3644. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.5.6 Printed circuit boards CNC Display Unit for is Name Drawing number series CNC Motherboard A20B–8100–0800 CE card CE card 1 A20B–3300–0330 CE card 2 A20B–3300–0320 Power supply unit A20B–8100–0720 Printed circuit board of Inverter A20B–8001–092
  • Page 365B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.6 MOUNTING AND REMOVING AN OPTION BOARD WARNING The replacement described here should be performed by a person fully trained in maintenance and safety. If the cabinet is opened to replace the option board, take extreme care not to touch any high–v
  • Page 3664. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.6.1.2 (1) Holding handles A and B, insert the board into the cabinet until the Mounting the board connector on the back panel is connected. (2) Connect the removed cables to correct positions. Handle A With a hook on the top side Handle B With a h
  • Page 367B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.6.2 Mounting and Removing a Mini–Slot Option Board (Except DeviceNet Board) 4.6.2.1 (1)Remove cables connected to the target mini–slot option board. Removing the board Remove other cables that would obstruct the removal of the mini–slot option boa
  • Page 3684. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.6.3 Mounting and Removing the DeviceNet Board 4.6.3.1 (1) Remove the terminal block from the connector on the DeviceNet Removing the board board. The terminal block can be pulled out after the screws on both sides are loosened. The terminal block
  • Page 369B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE Handle C With a hook on the left side Handle D 339
  • Page 3704. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.7 MOUNTING AND REMOVING THE BACK PANEL WARNING The replacement described here should be performed by a person fully trained in maintenance and safety. If the cabinet is opened to replace the back panel, take extreme care not to touch any high–volt
  • Page 371B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE Fan connector Latch Back panel Back panel 341
  • Page 3724. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.8 REPLACING THE WARNING FUSE OF THE Before starting the replacement of a fuse, remove the cause CONTROL UNIT of the fuse burn–out. Accordingly, the replacement should be performed by a person fully trained in maintenance and safety. If the cabinet
  • Page 373B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.9 Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is backed REPLACING THE up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The BATTERY above data
  • Page 3744. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Replacing the battery If a lithium battery is used, have A02B–0200–K102 (FANUC internal code: A98L–0031–0012) handy. (1) Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off. (2) Remove the battery from the top area of the CNC unit. Disconnec
  • Page 375B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE When using commercial D–size alkaline dry cells D General method Use the connector connected to the lithium battery for an external battery. Following the battery replacement procedure described above, replace the standard lithium battery with an ex
  • Page 3764. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 D Replacing the battery (1) Have commercial D–size alkaline dry cells handy. (2) Turn the CNC on. (3) Remove the lid from the battery case. (4) Replace the old dry cells with new ones. Mount the dry cells in a correct orientation. (5) Replace the li
  • Page 377B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.10 REPLACING A FAN UNIT WARNING If the cabinet is opened to replace a fan unit, take extreme care not to touch any high–voltage area (marked with and covered by a shock prevention cover). If the area is uncovered, direct contact with this area wil
  • Page 3784. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 4.11 REPLACING THE WARNING FUSE OF THE LCD Before starting the replacement of the fuse, remove the UNIT cause of the fuse burn–out. Accordingly, the replacement should be performed by a person fully trained in maintenance and safety. If the cabinet
  • Page 379B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.12 REPLACING THE WARNING LCD BACKLIGHT The replacement described here should be performed by a person fully trained in maintenance and safety. If the cabinet is opened to replace the unit, take extreme care not to touch any high–voltage area (mark
  • Page 3804. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 (2) Disconnect inverter cable connector CP1 and video signal cable connector CN8, then remove the LCD panel from the unit. LCD panel (3) For 9.5″ monochrome LCD Connector Metal catch Back of the LCD panel Backlight (4) After replacing the backlight,
  • Page 381B–63525EN/02 4. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE 4.13 HEAT GENERATION OF THE UNITS Heat Unit Remarks generation Control unit 1–slot cabinet 30W (*1) 3–slot cabinet 43W Option board HSSB board 4W Sub–CPU board 14W PMC C board 7W Serial communication 7W board Symbol CAPi T board 10W RISC board 9W Da
  • Page 3824. STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B–63525EN/02 Heat Unit Remarks generation MDI unit 0W Operator’s panel I/O module 12W (*1) Connector panel I/O module (ba- 8W (*1) sic) Connector panel I/O module (ex- 5W (*1) pansion) Separate detector interface unit 9W Unit with 4 basic axes only Separate dete
  • Page 3835. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) This chapter describes the hardware common to the LCD–mounted type i series and stand–alone type i series. 5.1 MOUNTING
  • Page 3845. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.1 MOUNTING AND WARNING DEMOUNTING CARD Only those personnel who have received approved safety PCBS and maintenance training may perform this replacement work. When opening the cabinet and replacing a c
  • Page 3855. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.1.1 1) Pull outward the claw of each of the four spacers used to secure the card Demounting a Card PCB, then release each latch. (See Fig. a.) PCB 2) Extract the card PCB upward. (See Fig. b.) Card PCB
  • Page 3865. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.1.2 1) Check that the claw of each of the spacers is latched outward, then Mounting a Card PCB insert the card PCB into the connector. (See Fig. c.) 2) Push the claw of each spacer downward to secure t
  • Page 3875. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.2 MOUNTING AND WARNING DEMOUNTING DIMM Only those personnel who have received approved safety MODULES and maintenance training may perform this replacement work. When opening the cabinet and replacing
  • Page 3885. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.2.1 1) Open the claw of the socket outward. (See Fig. a.) Demounting a DIMM 2) Extract the module slantly upward. (See Fig. b.) Module 5.2.2 1) Insert the module slantly into the module socket, with si
  • Page 3895. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.3 The performance of the heat exchanger degrades due to a buildup of dirt. Clean the heat exchanger periodically. The cleaning interval depends on MAINTENANCE OF the installation environment. So, clean
  • Page 3905. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 Cleaning and replacing the air filter Procedure for cleaning and replacing the air filter 1 Before cleaning and replacing the air filter, turn off the fan power supply. 2 Remove the filter cover, then de
  • Page 3915. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) Cleaning the heat exchanger Procedure for cleaning the heat exchanger 1 Before cleaning the heat exchanger, turn off the fan power supply. 2 Demount the external fan unit from the main body of the heat e
  • Page 3925. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 D Cleaning the fan of the heat exchanger Procedure for cleaning the fan of the heat exchanger 1 Demount the heat exchanger from the unit, then remove dust and mist from the fan by blowing air or by using
  • Page 3935. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.4 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) Brightness of the When the ambient temperature is low, the brightness of the LCD monochrome LCD decreases. (The LCD screen is dark particularly immediately after the powe
  • Page 3945. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 <6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely. 2) Applying the protection sheet 2–1) For A02B–0236–K110 <1> Fold the tab over the front side (the side opposite to the backing sheet). Fold <2> P
  • Page 3955. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 2–2) For A02B–0236–K130 <1> Peel off the white film attached on the back (facing the LCD) of the new protection sheet. <2> Attach the protection sheet so that it is to the lower–left of the replacement t
  • Page 3965. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 Touch panel compensation D Condition that requires Touch panel compensation is required: compensation 1 When the LCD unit is replaced 2 When the touch panel is replaced 3 When the touch panel control pri
  • Page 3975. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 6 After pressing all of the nine compensation points, press the key to terminate compensation. To cancel compensation or start all over again, press the key. 7 Upon normal termination, the
  • Page 3985. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.5 By changing the setting (rotary switch) on an expansion module, a connection can be made to skip an expansion module or expansion DISTRIBUTED I/O modules as shown below. SETTING Basic module Basic mo
  • Page 3995. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) Setting Indication Meaning of setting position 2 2 Set the rotary switch of an expansion module to this position when the two preceding expansion mod- ules are skipped. 3 – Setting prohibited 4 to F 4, –
  • Page 4005. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 NOTE To expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with a manual pulse generator interface) (A03B–0815–C002), a rotary switch is added as the other modules are modified. However, expansion module A is always ins
  • Page 4015. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.6 REPLACING FUSES WARNING ON VARIOUS UNITS Before replacement of a blown fuse, the cause of the blown fuse must be corrected. So, fuse replacement work must be done only by a person who is trained in t
  • Page 4025. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 D Fuse mounting location on the connector panel I/O modules Fuse Expansion module 3 Expansion module 2 Expansion module 1 Basic module Cable for the I/O Link (A03B–0815–C001) Cable for a manual pulse gen
  • Page 4035. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) D Fuse mounting location on the operator’s panel I/O modules I/O connector JD1A JD1B JA3 Fuse Power supply connector This drawing is for A20B–2002–0470, A20B–2002–0520, and A20B–2002–0521. D Fuse mountin
  • Page 4045. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 D Fuse mounting locations on the machine operator’s panel interface unit CM26 FU1 CPD1 FU3 FU2 CM17 JD1A JD1B CM16 CM15 FU1: Fuse for +24V (for protection of general–purpose DO and the power supply of th
  • Page 4055. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) D Fuse mounting location on the separate detector interface unit Power connector Optical Fuse connector 375
  • Page 4065. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.7 The control units and various peripheral units supplied from FANUC are designed assuming that those units are accommodated in enclosed ENVIRONMENTAL cabinets. The cabinets mentioned here include: CON
  • Page 4075. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.8 The CNC is becoming increasingly smaller as the surface mount technology and custom LSI technology advance. COUNTERMEA- SURES AGAINST In many cases, as the CNC becomes more compact, the mounting NOIS
  • Page 4085. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 NOTE 1 Separate binding is to separate the bound cables of one group at least 10 cm from the bound cables of another group. 2 Electromagnetic shielding is to shield the bound cables of one group from the
  • Page 4095. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.8.2 With a CNC machine tool, three ground systems are used. Grounding (1) Signal ground system (SG) Signal ground (SG) provides a reference voltage (0 V) for the electric signal system. (2) Frame groun
  • Page 4105. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.8.3 LCD–mounted type control unit Signal Ground (SG) Connection of Control Unit M4 stud Ground cable Wire of 2 mm2 or more Connect the 0 V line inside the control unit to the ground plate of the cabine
  • Page 4115. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) LCD stand–alone type control unit For a one–slot rack For a three–slot rack Ground terminal for signals Ground terminal for signals M4 (Screw hole) (Faston terminal) M3 (Screw hole) Ground wire 2 mm2 or
  • Page 4125. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.8.4 With a power magnetics cabinet, components such as an AC/DC solenoid Noise Suppressor and AC/DC relay are used. When turned on and off, these components generate a high–energy pulse voltage due to
  • Page 4135. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.8.5 According to the figure below, clamp all cables that require shielding and Cable Clamping and are run to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, and so forth. This clamping method not only sec
  • Page 4145. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 ÇÇ Mounting plate of the machine ÇÇ Control unit ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ Ground plate ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ Clamp Shield cover ÇÇ Fig. 5.8.5 (b) Cable clamp (2) Prepare a ground plate as shown below. Ground
  • Page 4155. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) Ground plate 8mm 12mm 20mm Fig. 5.8.5 (d) Ground plate hole diagram Reference: Outline drawing of the clamp 55 mm maximum 28mm 6mm 17mm Fig. 5.8.5 (e) Outline drawing of clamp Ordering code of the clamp:
  • Page 4165. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.9 An MDI unit usable with a 12.1” LCD has a connector panel that allows various interface connectors to be placed on the front. The connector NOTES ON USING panel has a cover. The cover is opened and c
  • Page 4175. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.10 REPLACING THE MAINTENANCE PARTS OF CNC DISPLAY UNIT FOR PC FUNCTIONS AND PANEL i 5.10.1 Replacing the Battery D Ordering number Item Ordering number Lithium battery A02B–0200–K102 387
  • Page 4185. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 D Replacing method (1) After a lapse of five minutes from power up, power off the CNC display unit with PC functions or the PANEL i. Then remove the CNC display unit with PC functions or the PANEL i from
  • Page 4195. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) When this procedure is used to replace the battery, normally the BIOS settings are not cleared. However, in case the settings are cleared, the following message appears during power up, the default BIOS
  • Page 4205. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 D Replacing method (1) Make sure the CNC display unit with PC functions or the PANEL i is powered off. (2) Remove the CNC display unit with PC functions or the PANEL i from the panel so that it can be ac
  • Page 4215. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) D Replacing the fan for (1) Make sure the CNC display unit with PC functions or the PANEL i is main body powered off. (2) Loosen the two screws (A), then remove the fan retaining metal sheet. (3) Remove
  • Page 4225. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 Fan retaining metal sheet Perform wiring as shown below. Be sure to install the fan in the cor- rect direction. Note the cabling Air Flow direction. Two screws (B) A08B–0082–B031 to –B038, –B041 to –B048
  • Page 4235. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) D Replacing the fan for (1) Make sure the CNC display unit with PC functions or the PANEL i is HDD powered off. (2) Remove the fan connector (CN7) on the main board. Since the connector is fixed with a l
  • Page 4245. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.10.5 For the CNC display unit with PC functions or the PANEL i, the surface Replacing the Touch of the touch panel is covered with the protection sheet to protect it. When there are flaws and contamina
  • Page 4255. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) 5.11 REPLACING THE MAINTENANCE PARTS OF CNC DISPLAY UNIT FOR is SERIES CNC 5.11.1 Replacing Procedure of Mother Board WARNING Only those personnel who were well trained for maintenance and safety can per
  • Page 4265. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 <2> Disconnect the cables from PCMCIA2 (PCMCIA interface connector), CN8 (video signal interface connector), and CN2 (soft key connector) located on the mother board. When the touch panel is attached, al
  • Page 4275. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE B–63525EN/02 AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) D Location of Fuse Rear of units Fuse 5.11.3 Since the display unit for the is series CNC has no battery, replacement Replacing the Battery is not required. 5.11.4 Replacing the Fan Motor D Ordering numb
  • Page 4285. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD–MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B–63525EN/02 5.11.5 LCD back–light can not be replaced for CNC display unit for is series Replacing the LCD CNC. Back–Light 5.11.6 For the LCD display unit with a touch panel, the surface of the touch panel Replacing
  • Page 429B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA After you change a SRAM module, you must set various data again. This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the parameters, the part programs and the tool offset values. 6.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . .
  • Page 4306. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 6.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT D Setting procedure of Parameter writing is enabled with following steps 1 to 3. parameters 1. Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state. 2. Press OFFSET SETTING key several times or press soft key [SETING] to display SET
  • Page 431B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6. After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on the SETTING screen to 0. Press RESET to release alram 100. 7. Convenient method 1) To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key or , then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set param
  • Page 4326. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 6.2 The main CPU memorized the following data. Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally INPUTTING/ (1) CNC paramter OUTPUTTING (2) PMC parameter DATA (3) Pitch error compensation amount (4) Custom macro variable values (5) Tool compen
  • Page 433B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 0102 pecification number of input/output device Set value Input/output device 0 RS–232–C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4) 1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/ B2) 2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1) 3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card
  • Page 4346. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 6.2.3 1. Select MDI mode. Outputting PMC 2. Press OFFSET SETTING key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen. Parameters 3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and input 1 and INPUT . At this time, alarm 100 will be generated. 4. Press SYSTEM key and
  • Page 435B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.2.5 When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable no. 500 and Outputting Custom later are output. Macro Variable Values 1. Press OFFSET SETTING key. 2. Press key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro variable screen. 3. Press soft key [(O
  • Page 4366. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 6.2.8 1. Set to the emergency stop state. Inputting CNC 2. Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct. Parameters In addition, l indicates the standard setting for input/output devices made by FANUC. Change these settings according to the u
  • Page 437B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 7) 0103 Baud rate 1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400 2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800 3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600 4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS] 3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key 4. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters are started. 5. Because alarm 300 will g
  • Page 4386. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 6.2.10 1. Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode. Inputting Pitch Error 2. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen. Compensation Amount 3. Press PROG key and soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents. 4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F
  • Page 439B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 12.Press address O and a program number (0001 for example) ,then press DELETE to delete the program. 6.2.12 Item 4 is not required for PPR. Inputting Tool 1. Select the EDIT mode. Compensation Amount 2. Turn off the program protect (KEY=1). 3. Press PROG key,
  • Page 4406. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 For PPR, item 4 is not required. 1. Confirm that mode is EDIT mode. 2. Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1). 3. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to select a part program file. 4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [F SRH], and 6 [EXEC] to select a part progra
  • Page 441B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.3 INPUT/OUTPUT Super CAPi DATA 6.3.1 The following operation allows all the data used for Super CAPi M to be Input/Output of input and output in a lump. Conversational Data in a 1. Confirm the parameters shown below: P0020: I/O CHANNEL (select I/O device) :
  • Page 4426. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Series16i Conversational Data Screen DATA I/O @ READ DATA I/O PARA GUIDE READ I/O CHANNEL =0 @ PUNCH EXEC I/O DEVICE NO. =3 OR @ ALL CAP DATA PUNCH @ DEFAULT DATA EXEC @ PRE–TOOL LIST @ TOOL FILE @ CUT COND FILE SELECT FROM SOFT-KEY < FLOPPY READ PUNCH ALL DE
  • Page 443B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.3.2 You can input and output files individually. Input and Output of Each Execute the same operations from step 1 to 6 in the previous section 3.3.1. File (Super CAPi M) (1) Reading or Punching default files 7 Press [DEF. FILE]. 8 @ For reading, input a fil
  • Page 4446. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 PROGRAM NO. = 1234 ³SFTKY INITAL SET FC25 BAR PROC(01) BAR OUTER END HEAD–L ROUGH T0505 PROC(02) BAR OUTER END HEAD–L FIN T0505 PROC(03) TRANS PROC(04) BAR OUTER END HEAD–R ROUGH T0505 PROC(05) BAR OUTER END HEAD–R FIN T0505 < CAN- EXE CEL C When [EXEC] is pr
  • Page 445B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA Input of conversational The machining program punched out by applying the procedure described machining programs on the previous page can be read into the NC via a reader/punch interface. A machining program can also be read from the memory card by setting bi
  • Page 4466. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 (3) Display the tool data menu screen, then press [+]. The following soft keys appear. Press [PUNCH]. < 10 11 READ PUN CLEA \ CH R NOTE 1 When data is output to a memory card, the file name is CAPTOOL.DAT. 2 When an attempt is made to output data to a memory
  • Page 447B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.4 INITIAL SCREEN INPUTTING/ Symbolic OUTPUTTING Symbol FAPT TURN CAPi T PRESS [FAMILY PRESS [DATA PROGRAM] SET] KEY **FAMILY PROGRAM** **PARAMETER & DATA SET** 1. FAMILY PROGRAM OUTPUT 1. SYSTEM DATA SETTING 2. FAMILY PROGRAM INPUT 2. SETTING DATA CORRECTIO
  • Page 4486. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 [TABLE 1] Input/Output of Family Program I/O Item Operation on I/O Remarks device Input Family program 2, n [INPUT] n=P⇒FANUC PPR ⇒ n=B⇒FANUC Cassette Sub cycle 5, n [INPUT] n=C⇒Sub Memory Output Family program 1, n [INPUT] *When n is omitted, parameter Sub c
  • Page 449B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.5 Symbol CAPi T data is stored in the sub–memory (SRAM) on the symbol CAPi T board. When replacing the symbol CAPi T board, perform data DUMP/RESTORE OF input/output operation according to this section. Symbol CAPi T DATA 6.5.1 1. System parameter (FAPT–SYS
  • Page 4506. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 6.6 CLEARING Symbol CAPi T DATA 6.6.1 Deleting File Name and Symbolic FAPT TURN Files (Initial screen) Press [Family program] Press [DATA SET] key key “Family program” menu “PARAMETER & DATASET” screen menu key Press [FILE NAME] key Not only file names of fam
  • Page 451B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.6.2 Press SP while turning on power. Clearing Symbol CAPi T Memory 421
  • Page 4526. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 6.7 To input/output a particular type of data, the corresponding screen is usually selected. For example, the parameter screen is used for parameter DATA INPUT/OUTPUT input from or output to an external input/output unit, while the program ON THE ALL IO scree
  • Page 453B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.7.1 Input/output–related parameters can be set on the ALL IO screen. Setting Parameters can be set, regardless of the mode. Input/Output–Related Parameters Setting input/output–related parameters Procedure 1 Press function key SYSTEM . 2 Press the rightmost
  • Page 4546. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 5 Set the parameters corresponding to the type of input/output unit to be used. (Parameter setting is possible regardless of the mode.) Tip First, set an I/O channel. The parameters on this screen change to those corresponding to a specified I/O channel. D I/
  • Page 455B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.7.2 A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting and When entering a program using a cassette or card, the user must specify the input file containing the program (file search). Outputting Programs File search Procedure 1 Press soft
  • Page 4566. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Inputting a program Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 6.7.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. ⋅ A program directory is
  • Page 457B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA Outputting programs Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 6.7.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. ⋅ A program directory is
  • Page 4586. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Deleting files Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 6.7.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. ⋅ A program directory is disp
  • Page 459B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.7.3 Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting and Outputting Parameters Inputting parameters Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 6.7.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . Sof
  • Page 4606. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 6.7.4 Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting and Outputting Offset Data Inputting offset data Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 6.7.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] .
  • Page 461B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.7.5 Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen. Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables Outputting custom macro common variables Procedure 1 Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 6.7.1. 2 Select EDIT mod
  • Page 4626. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 6.7.6 The ALL IO screen supports the display of a directory of floppy files, as Inputting and well as the input and output of floppy files. Outputting Floppy Files Displaying a file directory Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on t
  • Page 463B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345 No. FILE NAME (Meter) VOL 0001 PARAMETER 46.1 0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3 0003 O0001 11.9 0004 O0002 11.9 0005 O0003 11.9 0006 O0004 0007 O0005 11.9 0008 O0010 11.9 0009 O0020 11.9 11.9 F SRH File No.=2 >2_ EDIT * * * * * * * * * *
  • Page 4646. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Inputting a file Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 6.7.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] . 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft k
  • Page 465B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA Outputting a file Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 6.7.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] . 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft
  • Page 4666. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Deleting a file Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 6.7.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] . 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft ke
  • Page 467B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 6.8 By setting the I/O channel (parameter No. 20) to 4, files on a memory card can be referenced, and different types of data such as part programs, DATA INPUT/OUTPUT parameters, and offset data on a memory card can be input and output in USING A MEMORY text
  • Page 4686. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Displaying a directory of stored files Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. Using pag
  • Page 469B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA Searching for a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N0
  • Page 4706. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Reading a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. Then, the screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N0
  • Page 471B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 8 To specify a file with its file name, press soft key [N READ] in step 6 above. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0001 N00010 No. FILE NAME COMMENT 0012 O0050 (MAIN PROGRAM) 0013 TESTPRO (SUB PROGRAM–1) 0014 O0060 (MACRO PROGRAM) ~ ~ R
  • Page 4726. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Writing a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N00045 N
  • Page 473B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA Deleting a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N00045
  • Page 4746. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Batch input/output with a memory card On the ALL IO screen, different types of data including part programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error data, custom macros, and workpiece coordinate system data can be input and output using a memory card; the screen
  • Page 475B–63525EN/02 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA PAGE 6 With page keys PAGE and , scroll through the file directory or program directory. 7 When this screen is displayed, the program data item is selected. The soft keys for other screens are displayed by pressing the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key)
  • Page 4766. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63525EN/02 Error codes Memory card error codes Code Meaning 007 The memory card is protected. 030 The memory card is not inserted into its slot. 032 The memory card’s battery is exhausted. 102 The memory card does not have sufficient free space. 105 No memory card is mo
  • Page 477B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC This chapter describes the signals between the machine operator’s panel, magnetics cabinet and the PMC, connection of the signals between PMC and CNC, and confirmation method of on/off state of these signals. It also descri
  • Page 4787.1 GENERAL OF High–speed processing signal PMCDGN Input Contacts *DEC a *ESP, SKIP, ESKIP, XAE, YAE, ZAE (M series) [0] . . 0V Open *DEC a *ESP, SKIP, ESKIP, XAE, ZAE, +MIT a (T series) [1] . . 24V Close INTERFACE NC PMCDGN PMCDGN * DI/DO PMC–SA/SB MT (Machine Tool builder) ST1 DOOR ST ST1 G X RV X
  • Page 479B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC 7.2.1 Specification Series 21i/210i/210is–B Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is–B Function PMC–SA1 PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 (loader control) Programmingmethod Ladder Ladder Ladder Number of ladder levels 2 2 3 1st level exe
  • Page 4807. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 NOTE 1 The maximum number of steps assumes programming using basic instructions. The maximum number of steps varies according to the status of functional instruction use. 2 The total sequence program size (including all of the ladders, symbols/comments,
  • Page 481B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC NOTE 1 I/O of channel 2 of the I/O Link can be assigned. This area is usable when the I/O Link point extension option is selected. 2 This area is reserved for the PMC. I/O cannot be assigned to this area. Do not use this area for sequence programs. 3 This
  • Page 4827. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 (3) R9002 to R9005 (Operation output registers for the DIVB functional instruction) The data remaining after the DIVB functional instruction is executed in output. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 R9002 R9003 Register for remainder R9004 (used by DIVB instruction
  • Page 483B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC R9091.5 104ms 96ms 200ms R9091.6 504ms 496ms 1s (5) Ladder execution start signal, ladder stop signal, ladder execution state signal (PMC–SB7) 1 Ladder execution start signal and latter stop signal With the ladder execution start signal or the ladder stop
  • Page 4847. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 R9015 R9091.2: Ladder execution state signal 0: Ladder stopped 1: Ladder being executed 7.2.4 Execution Period of PMC For PMC–SA1 Sequence program 1st level From NC (High–speed se- (1) quence) END1 2nd level (Normal sequence) (2)–
  • Page 485B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC For PMC–SB7 CNC (F) 1st level END1 2nd level Synchronized buffer END2 3rd END2level END3 Machine (X) From NC Ladder execution time 1st level Division 1 Division 2 Division n 2nd level 3rd level 8ms 8ms 8ms The ratio of the 1st level execution time to the
  • Page 4867. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 D For a ladder that uses the 3rd level, the setting of the upper limit (150) may not ensure full 3rd level operation. In such a case, set this parameter so that the processing times of the 1st level and 2nd level are reduced. The 1st ladder level or the
  • Page 487B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7.3 PMC SCREEN 7.3.1 PMC Menu Selection Procedure Using Soft Keys PMC–SA1 screen menu selection procedure [PMC] [PMCLAD] Ladder diagram display screen [PMCDGN] [TITLE] Title screen [STATUS] Signal status screen [ALARM] Alarm screen [TRACE] Trace function
  • Page 4887. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 PMC–SB7 screen menu selection procedure [PMC] [PMCLAD] [EDIT] Ladder diagram display screen Selection monitor function Ladder diagram editing screen [PMCDGN] [TITLE] Title screen [STATUS] Signal status screen [ALARM] Alarm screen [TRACE] Signal trace scr
  • Page 489B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7.3.2 Press soft key [PMCLAD], and a sequence program is displayed PMCLAD Screen dynamically and operation monitoring can be confirmed : (PMC–SA1) Number of net displayed Ladder display RUN/STOP status LADDER NET 0001–0004 MONIT RUN Comment LOG1 LOG1 ALWA
  • Page 4907. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 [Remarks] ⋅ The search function searches a signal in the forward direction and displays the ladder with the searched signal at its head. Because there may exist plural contacts, repeat the search operation to find plural locations, repeat the search oper
  • Page 491B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC D Display of setting trigger The setting address, condition and counter are displayed at the title line. “MODE:ON : X0000. 0 : 0 : 0001 ” COUNT: Trigger checking number (default 1) POINT: Trigger checking number (default 0) 0 : the top of the 1st level 1
  • Page 4927. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 (4) [TRGSRC]: An instruction at which the trigger function has been stopped by a specified address signal is searched for and indicated by blinking. (5) [INIT] : The trigger setting is initialized. D Divided display of ladder This function is used for di
  • Page 493B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7.3.3 Screen transitions are made as shown below. Ladder Diagram Display/Editing (PMC–SB7) PMC main menu [<] [LADDER DIAGRAM] Display (NOTE 1) Display function Program list (monitor) display screen [LIST] [ZOOM] [LIST] [ZOOM] [SWITCH] Ladder diagram Selec
  • Page 4947. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 D Transition to the selection monitor screen [SWITCH] D Forced input/output function (FORCING mode) “Number” + ENTER key Screen manipulation Soft keys on the ladder diagram display screen Main soft keys on the ladder diagram display screen Program list L
  • Page 495B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC D [SEARCH] Address/net number search This soft key searches for the address or net number corresponding to an entered character string, and displays the address on the screen. Both a bit address and a byte address can be searched for. When a number is ent
  • Page 4967. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 4 [EDIT] Calling the ladder diagram editing screen This soft key switches the screen display to the ladder diagram editing screen. This soft key is displayed only when the programmer function is enabled. While the online monitor function is enabled, the
  • Page 497B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Title information (details) Total number of programs Program subject to manipulation List display area Key input line Message display line Additional information line Simplified display screen A choice between the detail display screen and simplified disp
  • Page 4987. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 3 [SETING] Screen setting This soft key calls the setting screen for the program list display screen. Various settings for program list display can be modified. To return to the program list display screen, use the return key [<]. For details of the sett
  • Page 499B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 2 Calling the screen from the ladder diagram display screen On the ladder diagram display screen, press the [SWITCH] soft key. Ladder diagram display screen Selection monitor screen The selection monitor screen is shown below. Initially, no ladder diagram
  • Page 5007. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 Screen manipulation Selection monitor screen Jump to a ladder diagram net Program list screen Selection monitor screen initialization Erasing one net Setting for display Reading a ladder diagram net Switching to the ladder diagram display screen Soft key
  • Page 501B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC D Reading a ladder net on A ladder net can be read from the selection monitor screen. Use the the selection monitor procedure below to read a ladder net. screen (a) Specification of an address 1 Enter an address to be monitored. (Example: R14.7) 2 Press t
  • Page 5027. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 Ladder diagram display screen (search soft keys) 7.3.3.4 On the ladder diagram editing screen, a ladder program can be edited, and Ladder diagram editing its operation can be modified. To display the ladder diagram editing screen, press the [EDIT] soft k
  • Page 503B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Ladder diagram editing screen CAUTION 1 A ladder can be edited, regardless of whether operation is in progress or stopped. Before an edited ladder can be executed, however, the ladder must be updated. Press the [UPDATE] soft key or update the ladder when
  • Page 5047. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 Screen manipulation Soft keys on the ladder diagram editing screen Program list Net selection Copy Switching to search soft keys Addition of a new net Cut Paste Deletion Modification of a net Reflection of modifications Screen setting Sequence program st
  • Page 505B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 6 [SELECT] Selection of multiple nets This soft key is used to specify multiple nets when editing such as deletion, cut, or copy is performed. Determine the start point of a selection range with the [SELECT] soft key, then specify the end point of the sel
  • Page 5067. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 WARNING Use special care when starting/stopping a ladder program. If a ladder program is started/stopped when the start/stop timing is incorrect, or the machine state is improper, the machine may operate unexpectedly. Moreover, when a ladder program is s
  • Page 507B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC D Deleting a contact/coil function instruction [ ] D Adding/deleting a connection line [ ], [ ], [ ] D Editing the function instruction data table [TABLE] D Line/column insertion [INSLIN], [INSCLM], [APPCLM] D Changing the address of a contact or coil “Bi
  • Page 5087. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 7.3.3.6 Signal trace function (PMC–SB7) Signal trace screen The signal trace screen is displayed when you press the [TRACE] soft key (initial screen) on the PMC diagnosis screen. Signal trace screen (initial screen) Trace parameter setting When you press
  • Page 509B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (a) Sample/mode Set a sampling mode. D Period: A time period is used for sampling. D Signal transition: A signal transition is used for sampling. (b) Sampling/resolution Set the resolution of sampling. The default is 8 ms. The setting range is 8 ms to 1,0
  • Page 5107. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 Trigger position <– 1 second –><–––– 9 seconds ––––> | | | –1 0 9 (SEC) (i) Sampling condition This item becomes settable when “signal transition” is selected as the trace stop condition. Set a condition for sampling. D Trigger: Sampling is performed whe
  • Page 511B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Sampling address setting (a) Address setting On page 2 of the trace parameter setting screen, set the address of a signal to be sampled. Trace parameter setting screen (page 2) Specify a bit address for a signal address. If a byte address is input, bits 0
  • Page 5127. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 Trace execution After trace parameter setting, press the [START] soft key on the trace screen. Trace operation is started. The screens below are examples of execution in the period mode and signal transition mode. Signal trace execution screen (time cycl
  • Page 513B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Checking trace results Upon completion of trace execution, trace results can be checked. Signal trace result screen (time cycle mode) (a) Automatic selection range calculation display When you press the [MARK] soft key, the cursor position at that time is
  • Page 5147. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 (b) Enlarged/reduced trace result data display With the [Z.IN] or [Z.OUT] soft key, the graph can be enlarged or reduced. This operation changes the scale value of one graph division. Immediately after trace operation, the graph is enlarged to a maximum
  • Page 515B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7.3.4 Press soft key [PMCDGN] then PMC’s diagnostic screen is displayed. PMCDGN Screen D TITLE screen The title data registered when a ladder program is prepared is displayed. Page number PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN PMC PROGRAM NO. : EDITION NO. : PMC CON
  • Page 5167. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 D STATUS screen On/Off state of input/output signals and internal relay is displayed. PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 Signal G0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 name ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 Signal state
  • Page 517B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC D TRACE screen Every time a specified signal changes, the signal status is memorized in (PMC–SA1) the trace memory. This function is useful for identifying intermittent troubles. 1 Trace parameter screen PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN TRACE MODE : (0:1BYTE/1:
  • Page 5187. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 2 Trace memory contents display screen PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN 1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1) 2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF) Trace address NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 and mask 0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data(in pa- rentheses) I * * * * * * * ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
  • Page 519B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7.3.5 PMCPRM Screen D Inputting PMC parameters from the MDI 1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state. 2 Set PARAMETER WRITE (on setting screen) to 1 or set the program protect signal (KEY4) to 1. PWE KEY4 Timer f – Counter f f Either one Keep relay f – D
  • Page 5207. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 D COUNTER screen This screen sets and displays max. value of counter and current value of the counter instruction (SUB 4). Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key) Max. value of counter (Minimum value is specified by counter ins.) Current value of count
  • Page 521B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC D DATA TABLE screen 1 Data table setting screen No. of screen PMC DATA TBL CONTROL #001 MONIT RUN GROUP TABLE COUNT = 2 No. of data table NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE NO.OF DATA groups 001 D0000 00000000 0 10 002 D0020 00000011 1 20 003 004 No. of 005 data
  • Page 5227. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 2 Data display screen Group number Page number PMC PRM (DATA) 001/001 MONIT RUN NO. ADDRESS DATA 000 D0000 0 001 D0001 0 002 D0002 0 003 D0003 0 004 D0004 0 005 D0005 0 006 D0006 0 007 D0007 0 008 D0008 0 009 D0009 0 C.DATA G–SRCH SEARCH a. Soft key [C.D
  • Page 523B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC D Trace function start (PMC–SB7:K906.5) Manual (0): The trace function starts trace operation when the [EXEC] soft key is pressed. Automatic (1): The trace function starts sampling automatically after the power is turned on. D Enable editing (PMC–SB7:K901
  • Page 5247. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 7.3.7 Online Setting 7.3.7.1 Online setting screen Fig. 7.3.7.1 Online monitor setting screen Meanings of Soft key EMG ST: Terminates communication forcibly. Use this key if communication becomes abnormal and the connection cannot be terminated normally.
  • Page 525B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (2) Set the parameter of ”CHANNEL” and ”BAUD RATE”. (3) Move the cursor to the ”RS–232C” item with Up or Down Cursor key. (4) Select ”USE” with Left or Right Cursor key. 2 Case of connection by Ethernet (FAPT LADDER–III, Ladder Editing Package) (1) Move t
  • Page 5267. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 USE TIME : The maximum time in the communication processing is displayed. RS–232C : The communication condition of RS–232C is displayed. HIGH SPEED I/F : The communication condition of HIGH SPEED I/F is displayed. Displayed during the communication with
  • Page 527B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE D Automatic operation MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE, ETC EDIT [PMC ⇒ CNC] KEY3(Program protect key) [PMC ⇒ CNC) [PMC ⇒ CNC] ST (Cycle start) *FV0 to 7 *SP (Feed hold) (Feed rate over- SBK (Single block) ride) DRN (Dry
  • Page 5287. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 D Manual operation MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE, ETC Handle/ [PMC ⇒ CNC] [PMC ⇒ CNC] M incremental HSnA to D (Axis selection) n:1 to 3(No. of MPGs) MP1, MP2 A +α, –α (Jog feed) (Multiplier) N U JOG [PMC ⇒ CNC] [PMC ⇒ CNC] A RT (Rapid traverse) *JV0
  • Page 529B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7.5 (1) For 1–path control LIST OF INPUT/ The relationship of the addresses of the interface signals transferred between the CNC and PMC are shown below. OUTPUT SIGNALS CNC G000– PMC X000– MT F000– Y000– (2) For 2–path control The relationship of the addr
  • Page 5307. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 D List of input/output signals f : Available F : Available only with 2–path control – : Unavailable T M Symbol Signal name Address series series *+ED1 to *+ED8 External deceleration signal G118 f f *+L1 to *+L8 Overtravel signal G114 f f *-ED1 to *-ED8 E
  • Page 531B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Symbol Signal name Address series series *SSTP1 G027#3 f f *SSTP2 G027#4 f f Individual spindle stop signals *SSTP3 G027#5 f f *SSTP4 G026#6 f f *SUCPF Spindle unclamp completion signal G028#4 f – *TLV0 to *TLV9 Tool life count override signal G049#0
  • Page 5327. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 T M Symbol Signal name Address series series ARSTA G071#0 f f ARSTB G075#0 f f Alarm reset signal (serial spindle) ARSTC G205#0 f f ARSTD G267#0 f f B00 to B31 2nd auxiliary function code signal F030 to F033 f f BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2 f f BCLP B
  • Page 533B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Symbol Signal name Address series series DEFMDA G072#3 f f DEFMDB G076#3 f f Differential mode command signal (serial spindle) DEFMDC G206#3 f f DEFMDD G268#3 f f DEN Distribution end signal F001#3 f f DM00 F009#7 f f DM01 F009#6 f f Decode M signal D
  • Page 5347. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 T M Symbol Signal name Address series series EC0A to EC6A G143#0 to #6 f f EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to #6 f f Axis control command signal (PMC axis control) EC0C to EC6C G167#0 to #6 f f EC0D to EC6D G179#0 to #6 f f ECKZA F130#1 f f ECKZB F133#1 f f Followin
  • Page 535B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Symbol Signal name Address series series EIF0A to EIF15A G144,G145 f f EIF0B to EIF15B G156,G157 f f Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control) EIF0C to EIF15C G168,G169 f f EIF0D to EIF15D G180,G181 f f EINPA F130#0 f f EINPB F133#0 f f - In-pos
  • Page 5367. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 T M Symbol Signal name Address series series EOTNA F130#6 f f EOTNB F133#6 f f - Negative-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTNC F136#6 f f EOTND F139#6 f f EOTPA F130#5 f f EOTPB F133#5 f f - Positive-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis
  • Page 537B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Symbol Signal name Address series series EXOFA F047#4 f f EXOFB F051#4 f f Motor activation off status signal (serial spindle) EXOFC F170#4 f f EXOFD F268#4 f f EXRD External read start signal G058#1 f f EXSTP External read/punch stop signal G058#2 f
  • Page 5387. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 T M Symbol Signal name Address series series HROV 1% step rapid traverse override select signal G096#7 f f HS1A to HS1D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G018#0 to #3 f f HS1AO Software operator's panel signal(HS1A) F077#0 f f HS1BO Software opera
  • Page 539B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Symbol Signal name Address series series KEY1 to KEY4 Memory protect signal G046#3 to #6 f f KEYO Software operator's panel signal(KEY1 to KEY4) F075#6 f f LDT1A F045#4 f f LDT1B F049#4 f f Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle) LDT1C F168#4 f f LDT
  • Page 5407. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 T M Symbol Signal name Address series series Flexible synchronization control mode select signal switching MFSYNA to MFSYND F197#0 to #3 – f accepted signals MH Manual handle feed select check signal F003#1 f f MHPCC HPCC mode signal F066#6 – f MI1 to MI
  • Page 541B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Symbol Signal name Address series series MRDYA G070#7 f f MRDYB G074#7 f f Machine ready signal (serial spindle) MRDYC G204#7 f f MRDYD G266#7 f f MREF Manual reference position return selection check signal F004#5 f f MRMT DNC operation select check
  • Page 5427. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 T M Symbol Signal name Address series series OVRA G072#4 f f OVRB G076#4 f f Analog override command signal (serial spindle) OVRC G206#4 f f OVRD G268#4 f f PBATL Absolute position detector battery voltage low alarm signal F172#7 f f PBATZ Absolute posit
  • Page 543B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Symbol Signal name Address series series RCFNA F046#3 f f RCFNB F050#3 f f Output switch completion signal (serial spindle) RCFNC F169#3 f f RCFND F1267#3 f f RCHA G071#7 f f RCHB G075#7 f f Power line status check signal (serial spindle) RCHC G205#7
  • Page 5447. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 T M Symbol Signal name Address series series RSLA G071#6 f f RSLB G075#6 f f Output switch request signal (serial spindle) RSLC G205#6 f f RSLD G267#6 f f RST Reset signal F001#1 f f RT Manual rapid traverse selection signal G019#7 f f RTAP Rigid tapping
  • Page 545B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Symbol Signal name Address series series SGN G033#5 f f SGN2 G035#5 f f Spindle motor command polarity select signal SGN3 G037#5 f f SGN4 G273#5 f f SHA00 to SHA11 G078#0 to G079#3 f f SHB00 to SHB11 G080#0 to G081#3 f f Spindle orientation external s
  • Page 5467. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 T M Symbol Signal name Address series series SPSLA G071#2 f f SPSLB G075#2 f f Spindle select signal (serial spindle) SPSLC G205#2 f f SPSLD G267#2 f f SPSTP Spindle stop complete signal G028#6 f – SPSYC Spindle synchronous control signal G038#2 f f SPWR
  • Page 547B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Symbol Signal name Address series series SYNC to SYNC8 G138 f – Synchronous control axis selection signals SYNC to SYNC7 G138#0 to #6 F – SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8 Simple synchronous manual feed axis select signal G140 – f SYNMOD EGB mode signal F065#6 f T00 t
  • Page 5487. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 T M Symbol Signal name Address series series UINT Interrupt signal for custom macro G053#3 f f UO000 to UO015 F054,F055 f f Output signal for custom macro UO100 to UO131 F056 to F059 f f WATO Waiting signal F063#6 F F WOQSM Workpiece coordinate system sh
  • Page 549B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7.6 LIST OF ADDRESSES D Address list (1–path For a signal that is common to the M series and T series, and is usable for control) only one of the two series, hatching is provided on the upper part (the T series) or lower part (M series) for which the sign
  • Page 5507. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 PMC → CNC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 G003 G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN G005 BFIN AFL BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN G006 SKIPP OVC *AB
  • Page 551B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G025 EPNS EPN13 EPN12 EPN11 EPN10 EPN9 EPN8 G026 *SSTP4 SWS4 PC4SLC PC3SLC G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 G028 PC2SLC SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR GR31 GR21 G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV
  • Page 5527. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G050 *TLV9 *TLV8 G051 *CHLD CHPST *CHP8 *CHP4 *CHP2 *CHP0 G052 RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0 G053 CDZ SMZ UINT TMRON G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000 G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011
  • Page 553B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB G077 DSCNB SORSLB MPOFB SLVB MORCMB G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 G080 S
  • Page 5547. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 G101 G102 –J8 –J7 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1 G103 G104 +EXL8 +EXL7 +EXL6 +EXL5 +EXL4 +EXL3 +EXL2 +EXL1 G105 –EXL8 –EXL7 –EXL6 –EXL5 –EXL4 –EXL3 –EXL2 –EXL1 G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 G10
  • Page 555B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1 G125 IUDD8 IUDD7 IUDD6 IUDD5 IUDD4 IUDD3 IUDD2 IUDD1 G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 G127 G128 G129 G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G131 G132 +MIT4 +MIT
  • Page 5567. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E G152 G153 G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB ELCKZB EFINB G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5
  • Page 557B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD ELCKZD EFIND G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF
  • Page 5587. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G199 IOLBH3 IOLBH2 G200 EASIP8 EASIP7 EASIP6 EASIP5 EASIP4 EASIP3 EASIP2 EASIP1 G201 G202 G203 FTCLR FTCAL FTCMD G204 MRDYC ORCML SFRC SRVC CTH1C CTH2C TLMHC TLMLC G205 RCHC RSLC INTGC SOCNC MCFNC SPSLC *ESPC ARSTC G206 RCHHGC MFN
  • Page 559B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G224 G225 G226 G227 G228 G229 G230 G231 G232 G233 G234 G235 G236 G237 G238 G239 G240 G241 G242 G243 G244 G245 G246 G247 G248 529
  • Page 5607. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G249 G250 G251 G252 G253 G254 G255 G256 G257 G258 G259 G260 G261 G262 G263 G264 G265 G266 MRDYD ORCMD SFRD SRVD CTH1D CTH2D TLMHD TLMLD G267 RCHD RSLD INTGD SOCND MCFND SPSLD *ESPD ARSTD G268 RCHHGD MFNHGD INCMDD OVRD DEFMDD NRROD
  • Page 561B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G274 G275 G276 G277 G278 G279 G280 G281 G282 G283 G284 G285 G286 G287 G288 G289 G290 G291 G292 ITCD G293 G294 G295 G296 G297 G298 531
  • Page 5627. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G299 G300 G301 G302 G303 G304 G305 G306 G307 G308 G309 G310 G311 G312 G313 G314 G315 G316 G317 G318 G319 532
  • Page 563B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC CNC → PMC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL F002 MDRN CUT SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH MINC F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1 F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 MBDT6
  • Page 5647. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00 F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08 F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16 F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24 F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00 F031 B15
  • Page 565B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB F051 EXOFB SORENB MSOVRB INCSTB PC1DTB F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000 F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 U
  • Page 5667. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O
  • Page 567B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F100 ZP48 ZP47 ZP46 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41 F101 F102 MV8 MV7 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1 F103 F104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 F105 F106 MVD8 MVD7 MVD6 MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1 F107 F108 MMI8 MMI7 MMI6 MMI5 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2
  • Page 5687. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F125 F126 –OT8 –OT7 –OT6 –OT5 –OT4 –OT3 –OT2 –OT1 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA F131 EABUFA EMFA F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB E
  • Page 569B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F150 F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 ORARC TLMC LDT2C LDT1C SARC SDTC SSTC ALMC F169 MORA2C MORA1C PORA2C SLVSC RCFNC RCHPC C
  • Page 5707. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK F178 SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0 F179 F180 CLRCH8 CLRCH7 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1 F181 F182 EACNT8 EACNT7 EACNT6 EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1 F183
  • Page 571B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F200 F201 F202 F203 F204 F205 F206 F207 F208 EGBM8 EGBM7 EGBM6 EGBM5 EGBM4 EGBM3 EGBM2 EGBM1 F209 F210 F211 F212 F213 F214 F215 F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 F221 F222 F223 F224 541
  • Page 5727. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F225 F226 F227 F228 F229 F230 F231 F232 F233 F234 F235 F236 F237 F238 F239 F240 F241 F242 F243 F244 F245 F246 F247 F248 F249 542
  • Page 573B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F250 F251 F252 F253 F254 F255 F256 F257 F258 F259 F260 F261 F262 F263 F264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1 F265 SPWRN9 F266 ORARD TLMD LDT2D LDT1D SARD SDTD SSTD ALMD F267 MORA2D MORA1D PORA2D SLVSD RCFND RC
  • Page 5747. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F275 F276 F277 F278 F279 F280 F281 F282 F283 F284 F285 F286 F287 F288 F289 F290 F291 F292 F293 F294 F295 F296 F297 F298 F299 544
  • Page 575B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F300 F301 F302 F303 F304 F305 F306 F307 F308 F309 F310 F311 F312 F313 F314 F315 545
  • Page 5767. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 D Address list (2–path In general, signal addresses are assigned to each path as indicated below. control) However, some signals common to both paths are allocated to path 1. The table below indicates the addresses of the interface signals between the CN
  • Page 577B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC PMC → CNC Path 1 Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 ED7 #1 ED6 #1 ED5 #1 ED4 #1 ED3 #1 ED2 #1 ED1 #1 ED0 #1 G001 ED15 #1 ED14 #1 ED13 #1 ED12 #1 ED11 #1 ED10 #1 ED9 #1 ED8 #1 G002 ESTB #1 EA6 #1 EA5 #1 EA4 #1 EA3 #1 EA2 #1 EA1 #1 EA0 #1 G003
  • Page 5787. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G025 EPNS#1 EPN13#1 EPN12#1 EPN11#1 EPN10#1 EPN9#1 EPN8#1 G026 *SSTP4#1 SWS4#1 PC4SLC#1 PC3SLC#1 G027 CON #1 *SSTP3#1 *SSTP2#1 *SSTP1#1 SWS3 #1 SWS2 #1 SWS1 #1 G028 PC2SLC#1 SPSTP#1 *SCPF#1 *SUCPF#1 GR2 #1 GR1 #1 G029 *SSTP#1 SOR
  • Page 579B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G050 *TLV9 #1 *TLV8 #1 G051 *CHLD #1 CHPST #1 *CHP8 #1 *CHP4 #1 *CHP2 #1 *CHP0 #1 G052 G053 CDZ #1 SMZ #1 UINT #1 TMRON#1 G054 UI007 #1 UI006 #1 UI005 #1 UI004 #1 UI003 #1 UI002 #1 UI001 #1 UI000 #1 G055 UI015 #1 UI014 #1 UI013 #1
  • Page 5807. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G075 RCHB#1 RSLB #1 INTGB #1 SOCNB#1 MCFNB#1 SPSLB#1 *ESPB#1 ARSTB#1 G076 RCHHGB#1 MFNHGB#1 INCMDB#1 OVRB#1 DEFMDB#1 NRROB#1 ROTAB#1 INDXB#1 G077 DSCNB#1 SORSLB#1 MPOFB#1 SLVB#1 MORCMB#1 G078 SHA07#1 SHA06#1 SHA05#1 SHA04#1 SHA03#
  • Page 581B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 3# #2 #1 #0 G100 +J8#1 +J7#1 +J6#1 +J5#1 +J4 #1 +J3 #1 +J2 #1 +J1 #1 G101 G102 –J8 #1 –J7 #1 –J6 #1 –J5 #1 –J4 #1 –J3 #1 –J2 #1 –J1 #1 G103 G104 +EXL8#1 +EXL7#1 +EXL6#1 +EXL5#1 +EXL4#1 +EXL3#1 +EXL2#1 +EXL1#1 G105 –EXL8#1 –EXL7#1 –EXL6#1 –EXL5
  • Page 5827. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G124 DTCH8#1 DTCH7#1 DTCH6#1 DTCH5#1 DTCH4#1 DTCH3#1 DTCH2#1 DTCH1#1 G125 IUDD8#1 IUDD7#1 IUDD6#1 IUDD5#1 IUDD4#1 IUDD3#1 IUDD2#1 IUDD1#1 G126 SVF8 #1 SVF7 #1 SVF6 #1 SVF5 #1 SVF4 #1 SVF3 #1 SVF2 #1 SVF1 #1 G127 G128 MIX8 MIX7 MIX
  • Page 583B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G149 EID31A#1 EID30A#1 EID29A#1 EID28A#1 EID27A#1 EID26A#1 EID25A#1 EID24A#1 G150 DRNE#1 RTE #1 OVCE#1 ROV2E#1 ROV1E#1 G151 *FV7E#1 *FV6E#1 *FV5E#1 *FV4E#1 *FV3E#1 *FV2E#1 *FV1E#1 *FV0E#1 G152 G153 G154 EBUFB#1 ECLRB#1 ESTPB#1 ESOF
  • Page 5847. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD#1 ECLRD#1 ESTPD#1 ESOFD#1 ESBKD#1 EMBUFD#1 ELCKZD#1 EFIND#1 G179 EMSBKD#1 EC6D #1 EC5D #1 EC4D #1 EC3D #1 EC2D #1 EC1D #1 EC0D #1 G180 EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#1
  • Page 585B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G199 G200 EASIP8#1 EASIP7#1 EASIP6#1 EASIP5#1 EASIP4#1 EASIP3#1 EASIP2#1 EASIP1#1 G201 G202 G203 G204 MRDYC#1 ORCMC#1 SFRC#1 SRVC#1 CTH1C#1 CTH2C#1 TLMHC#1 TLMLC#1 G205 RCHC#1 RSLC#1 INTGC#1 SOCNC#1 MCFNC#1 SPSLC#1 *ESPC#1 ARSTC#1
  • Page 5867. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G224 G225 G226 G227 G228 G229 G230 G231 G232 G233 G234 G235 G236 G237 G238 G239 G240 G241 G242 G243 G244 G245 G246 G247 G248 556
  • Page 587B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G249 G250 G251 G252 G253 G254 G255 G256 G257 G258 G259 G260 G261 G262 G263 G264 G265 G266 MRDYD#1 ORCMD#1 SFRD#1 SRVD#1 CTH1D#1 CTH2D#1 TLMHD#1 TLMLD#1 G267 RCHD#1 RSLD#1 INTGD#1 SOCND#1 MCFND#1 SPSLD#1 *ESPD#1 ARSTD#1 G268 RCHHGD
  • Page 5887. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G274 G275 G276 G277 G278 G279 G280 G281 G282 G283 G284 G285 G286 G287 G288 G289 G290 G291 G292 ITCD#1 G293 G294 G295 G296 G297 G298 558
  • Page 589B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G299 G300 G301 G302 G303 G304 G305 G306 G307 G308 G309 G310 G311 G312 G313 G314 G315 G316 G317 G318 G319 559
  • Page 5907. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 PMC → CNC Path 2 Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1000 ED7#2 ED6#2 ED5#2 ED4#2 ED3#2 ED2#2 ED1#2 ED0#2 G1001 ED15#2 ED14#2 ED13#2 ED12#2 ED11#2 ED10#2 ED9#2 ED8#2 G1002 ESTB#2 EA6#2 EA5#2 EA4#2 EA3#2 EA2#2 EA1#2 EA0#2 G1003 G1004 MFIN3#2 MFIN2
  • Page 591B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1025 EPNS#2 EPN13#2 EPN12#2 EPN11#2 EPN10#2 EPN9#2 EPN8#2 G1026 *SSTP4#2 SWS4#2 PC4SLC#2 PC3SLC#2 G1027 CON#2 *SSTP3#2 *SSTP2#2 *SSTP1#2 SWS3#2 SWS2#2 SWS1#2 G1028 PC2SLC#2 SPSTP#2 *SCPF#2 *SUCPF#2 GR2#2 GR1#2 G1029 *SSTP#2 SOR#2
  • Page 5927. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1050 *TLV9 #2 *TLV8 #2 G1051 *CHLD #2 CHPST #2 *CHP8 #2 *CHP4 #2 *CHP2 #2 *CHP0 #2 G1052 G1053 CDZ#2 SMZ#2 UINT#2 TMRON#2 G1054 UI007#2 UI006#2 UI005#2 UI004#2 UI003#2 UI002#2 UI001#2 UI000#2 G1055 UI015#2 UI014#2 UI013#2 UI012#2
  • Page 593B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1075 RCHB#2 RSLB#2 INTGB #2 SOCNB#2 MCFNB#2 SPSLB#2 *ESPB#2 ARSTB#2 G1076 RCHHGB#2 MFNHGB#2 INCMDB#2 OVRB#2 DEFMDB#2 NRROB#2 ROTAB#2 INDXB#2 G1077 DSCNB#2 SORSLB#2 MPOFB#2 SLVB#2 MORCMB#2 G1078 SHA07#2 SHA06#2 SHA05#2 SHA04#2 SHA0
  • Page 5947. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1100 +J8#2 +J7#2 +J6#2 +J5#2 +J4#2 +J3#2 +J2#2 +J1#2 G1101 G1102 –J8#2 –J7#2 –J6#2 –J5#2 –J4#2 –J3#2 –J2#2 –J1#2 G1103 G1104 +EXL8#2 +EXL7#2 +EXL6#2 +EXL5#2 +EXL4#2 +EXL3#2 +EXL2#2 +EXL1#2 G1105 –EXL8#2 –EXL7#2 –EXL6#2 –EXL5#2 –E
  • Page 595B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1124 DTCH8#2 DTCH7#2 DTCH6#2 DTCH5#2 DTCH4#2 DTCH3#2 DTCH2#2 DTCH1#2 G1125 IUDD8#2 IUDD7#2 IUDD6#2 IUDD5#2 IUDD4#2 IUDD3#2 IUDD2#2 IUDD1#2 G1126 SVF8#2 SVF7#2 SVF6#2 SVF5#2 SVF4#2 SVF3#2 SVF2#2 SVF1#2 G1127 G1128 G1129 G1130 *IT8#
  • Page 5967. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1149 EID31A#2 EID30A#2 EID29A#2 EID28A#2 EID27A#2 EID26A#2 EID25A#2 EID24A#2 G1150 DRNE#2 RTE#2 OVCE#2 ROV2E#2 ROV1E#2 G1151 *FV7E#2 *FV6E#2 *FV5E#2 *FV4E#2 *FV3E#2 *FV2E#2 *FV1E#2 *FV0E#2 G1152 G1153 G1154 EBUFB#2 ECLRB#2 ESTPB#
  • Page 597B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1174 G1175 G1176 G1177 G1178 EBUFD#2 ECLRD#2 ESTPD#2 ESOFD#2 ESBKD#2 EMBUFD#2 ELCKZD#2 EFIND#2 G1179 EMSBKD#2 EC6D#2 EC5D#2 EC4D#2 EC3D#2 EC2D#2 EC1D#2 EC0D#2 G1180 EIF7D#2 EIF6D#2 EIF5D#2 EIF4D#2 EIF3D#2 EIF2D#2 EIF1D#2 EIF0D#2 G
  • Page 5987. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1199 G1200 EASIP8#2 EASIP7#2 EASIP6#2 EASIP5#2 EASIP4#2 EASIP3#2 EASIP2#2 EASIP1#2 G1201 G1202 G1203 G1204 MRDYC#2 ORCMC#2 SFRC#2 SRVC#2 CTH1C#2 CTH2C#2 TLMHC#2 TLMLC#2 G1205 RCHC#2 RSLC#2 INTGC#2 SOCNC#2 MCFNC#2 SPSLC#2 *ESPC#2
  • Page 599B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1224 G1225 G1226 G1227 G1228 G1229 G1230 G1231 G1232 G1233 G1234 G1235 G1236 G1237 G1238 G1239 G1240 G1241 G1242 G1243 G1244 G1245 G1246 G1247 G1248 569
  • Page 6007. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1249 G1250 G1251 G1252 G1253 G1254 G1255 G1256 G1257 G1258 G1259 G1260 G1261 G1262 G1263 G1264 G1265 G1266 MRDYD#2 ORCMD#2 SFRD#2 SRVD#2 CTH1D#2 CTH2D#2 TLMHD#2 TLMLD#2 G1267 RCHD#2 RSLD#2 INTGD#2 SOCND#2 MCFND#2 SPSLD#2 *ESPD#2
  • Page 601B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1274 G1275 G1276 G1277 G1278 G1279 G1280 G1281 G1282 G1283 G1284 G1285 G1286 G1287 G1288 G1289 G1290 G1291 G1292 ITCD#2 G1293 G1294 G1295 G1296 G1297 G1298 571
  • Page 6027. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1299 G1300 G1301 G1302 G1303 G1304 G1305 G1306 G1307 G1308 G1309 G1310 G1311 G1312 G1313 G1314 G1315 G1316 G1317 G1318 G1319 572
  • Page 603B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC CNC Path 1 → PMC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP#1 SA#1 STL#1 SPL#1 RWD#1 F001 MA#1 TAP#1 ENB#1 DEN#1 BAL#1 RST#1 AL#1 F002 MDRN#1 CUT#1 SRNMV#1 THRD#1 CSS#1 RPDO#1 INCH#1 F003 MTCHIN#1 MEDT#1 MMEM#1 MRMT#1 MMDI#1 MJ#1 MH#1 MINC#1 F004
  • Page 6047. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F025 S31#1 S30#1 S29#1 S28#1 S27#1 S26#1 S25#1 S24#1 F026 T07#1 T06#1 T05#1 T04#1 T03#1 T02#1 T01#1 T00#1 F027 T15#1 T14#1 T13#1 T12#1 T11#1 T10#1 T09#1 T08#1 F028 T23#1 T22#1 T21#1 T20#1 T19#1 T18#1 T17#1 T16#1 F029 T31#1 T30#1 T
  • Page 605B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F050 MORA2B#1 MORA1B#1 PORA2B#1 SLVSB#1 RCFNB#1 RCHPB#1 CFINB#1 CHPB#1 F051 EXOFB#1 SORENB#1 MSOVRB#1 INCSTB#1 PC1DTB#1 F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT#1 RPALM#1 RPBSY#1 PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007#1 UO006#1 UO005#1 UO004#1 UO003#1 UO002#1 UO00
  • Page 6067. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F075 SPO#1 KEYO#1 DRNO#1 MLKO#1 SBKO#1 BDTO#1 F076 ROV2O#1 ROV1O#1 RTAP#1 MP2O#1 MP1O#1 F077 RTO#1 HS1DO#1 HS1CO#1 HS1BO#1 HS1AO#1 F078 *FV7O#1 *FV6O#1 *FV5O#1 *FV4O#1 *FV3O#1 *FV2O#1 *FV1O#1 *FV0O#1 F079 *JV7O#1 *JV6O#1 *JV5O#1 *
  • Page 607B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F100 ZP48#1 ZP47#1 ZP46#1 ZP45#1 ZP44#1 ZP43#1 ZP42#1 ZP41#1 F101 F102 MV8#1 MV7#1 MV6#1 MV5#1 MV4#1 MV3#1 MV2#1 MV1#1 F103 F104 INP8#1 INP7#1 INP6#1 INP5#1 INP4#1 INP3#1 INP2#1 INP1#1 F105 F106 MVD8#1 MVD7#1 MVD6#1 MVD5#1 MVD4#1 M
  • Page 6087. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F125 F126 –OT7#1 –OT6#1 –OT5#1 –OT4#1 –OT3#1 –OT2#1 –OT4#1 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL#1 EOV0#1 F130 EBSYA#1 EOTNA#1 EOTPA#1 EGENA#1 EDENA#1 EIALA#1 ECKZA#1 EINPA#1 F131 EABUFA#1 EMFA#1 F132 EM28A#1 EM24A#1 EM22A#1 EM21A#1 EM18A#1 EM14A
  • Page 609B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F150 F151 EM48D#1 EM44D#1 EM42D#1 EM41D#1 EM38D#1 EM34D#1 EM32D#1 EM31D#1 F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 ORARC#1 TLMC#1 LDT2C#1 LDT1C#1 SARC#1 SDTC#1 SSTC#1 ALMC#1 F169 MORA2C #
  • Page 6107. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN#1 EPARM#1 EVAR#1 EPRG#1 EWTIO#1 ESTPIO#1 ERDIO#1 IOLNK#1 F178 SRLNO3#1 SRLNO2#1 SRLNO1#1 SRLNO0#1 F179 F180 CLRCH8#1 CLRCH7#1 CLRCH6#1 CLRCH5#1 CLRCH4#1 CLRCH3#1 CLRCH2#1 CLRCH1#1 F181 F182 EACNT8#1 EACNT7#1 EA
  • Page 611B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F200 F201 F202 F203 F204 F205 F206 F207 F208 F209 F210 F211 F212 F213 F214 F215 F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 F221 F222 F223 F224 581
  • Page 6127. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F225 F226 F227 F228 F229 F230 F231 F232 F233 F234 F235 F236 F237 F238 F239 F240 F241 F242 F243 F244 F245 F246 F247 F248 F249 582
  • Page 613B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F250 F251 F252 F253 F254 F255 F256 F257 F258 F259 F260 F261 F262 F263 SPWRN8 #1 SPWRN7 #1 SPWRN6 #1 SPWRN5 #1 SPWRN4 #1 SPWRN3 #1 SPWRN2 #1 SPWRN1 #1 F264 SPWRN9 #1 F265 F266 ORARD#1 TLMD#1 LDT2D#1 LDT1D#1 SARD#1 SDTD#1 SSTD#1 ALMD
  • Page 6147. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F275 F276 F277 F278 F279 F280 F281 F282 F283 F284 F285 F286 F287 F288 F289 F290 F291 F292 F293 F294 F295 F296 F297 F298 F299 584
  • Page 615B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F300 F301 F302 F303 F304 F305 F306 F307 F308 F309 F310 F311 F312 F313 F314 F315 585
  • Page 6167. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 CNC Path 2 → PMC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1000 OP#2 SA#2 STL#2 SPL#2 RWD#2 F1001 MA#2 TAP#2 ENB#2 DEN#2 BAL#2 RST#2 AL#2 F1002 MDRN#2 CUT#2 SRNMV#2 THRD#2 CSS#2 RPDO#2 INCH#2 F1003 MTCHIN#2 MEDT#2 MMEM#2 MRMT#2 MMDI#2 MJ#2 MH#2 MINC#2
  • Page 617B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1025 S31#2 S30#2 S29#2 S28#2 S27#2 S26#2 S25#2 S24#2 F1026 T07#2 T06#2 T05#2 T04#2 T03#2 T02#2 T01#2 T00#2 F1027 T15#2 T14#2 T13#2 T12#2 T11#2 T10#2 T09#2 T08#2 F1028 T23#2 T22#2 T21#2 T20#2 T19#2 T18#2 T17#2 T16#2 F1029 T31#2 T30
  • Page 6187. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1050 MORA2B#2 MORA1B#2 PORA2B#2 SLVSB#2 RCFNB#2 RCHPB#2 CFINB#2 CHPB#2 F1051 EXOFB#2 SORENB#2 MSOVRB#2 INCSTB#2 PC1DTB#2 F1052 F1053 BGEACT#2 RPALM#2 RPBSY#2 F1054 UO007#2 UO006#2 UO005#2 UO004#2 UO003#2 UO002#2 UO001#2 UO000#2 F
  • Page 619B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1075 SPO#2 KEYO#2 DRNO#2 MLKO#2 SBKO#2 BDTO#2 F1076 ROV2O#2 ROV1O#2 RTAP#2 MP2O#2 MP1O#2 F1077 RTO#2 HS1DO#2 HS1CO#2 HS1BO#2 HS1AO#2 F1078 *FV7O#2 *FV6O#2 *FV5O#2 *FV4O#2 *FV3O#2 *FV2O#2 *FV1O#2 *FV0O#2 F1079 *JV7O#2 *JV6O#2 *JV5O
  • Page 6207. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1100 ZP48#2 ZP47#2 ZP46#2 ZP45#2 ZP44#2 ZP43#2 ZP42#2 ZP41#2 F1101 F1102 MV8#2 MV7#2 MV6#2 MV5#2 MV4#2 MV3#2 MV2#2 MV1#2 F1103 F1104 INP8#2 INP7#2 INP6#2 INP5#2 INP4#2 INP3#2 INP2#2 INP1#2 F1105 F1106 MVD8#2 MVD7#2 MVD6#2 MVD5#2
  • Page 621B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1125 F1126 –OT7#2 –OT6#2 –OT5#2 –OT4#2 –OT3#2 –OT2#2 –OT1#2 F1127 F1128 F1129 *EAXSL#2 EOV0#2 F1130 EBSYA#2 EOTNA#2 EOTP#2 EGENA#2 EDENA#2 EIALA#2 ECKZA#2 EINPA#2 F1131 EABUFA#2 EMFA#2 F1132 EM28A#2 EM24A#2 EM22A#2 EM21A#2 EM18A#2
  • Page 6227. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1150 F1151 EM48D#2 EM44D#2 EM42D#2 EM41D#2 EM38D#2 EM34D#2 EM32D#2 EM31D#2 F1152 F1153 F1154 F1155 F1156 F1157 F1158 F1159 F1160 F1161 F1162 F1163 F1164 F1165 F1166 F1167 F1168 ORARC#2 TLMC#2 LDT2C#2 LDT1C#2 SARC#2 SDTC#2 SSTC#2
  • Page 623B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1175 F1176 F1177 EDGN#2 EPARM#2 EVAR#2 EPRG#2 EWTIO#2 ESTPIO#2 ERDIO#2 IOLNK#2 F1178 SRLNO3#2 SRLNO2#2 SRLNO1#2 SRLNO0#2 F1179 F1180 CLRCH8#2 CLRCH7#2 CLRCH6#2 CLRCH5#2 CLRCH4#2 CLRCH3#2 CLRCH2#2 CLRCH1#2 F1181 F1182 EACNT8#2 EACN
  • Page 6247. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1200 F1201 F1202 F1203 F1204 F1205 F1206 F1207 F1208 F1209 F1210 F1211 F1212 F1213 F1214 F1215 F1216 F1217 F1218 F1219 F1220 F1221 F1222 F1223 F1224 594
  • Page 625B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1225 F1226 F1227 F1228 F1229 F1230 F1231 F1232 F1233 F1234 F1235 F1236 F1237 F1238 F1239 F1240 F1241 F1242 F1243 F1244 F1245 F1246 F1247 F1248 F1249 595
  • Page 6267. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1250 F1251 F1252 F1253 F1254 F1255 F1256 F1257 F1258 F1259 F1260 F1261 F1262 F1263 F1264 SPWRN8 #2 SPWRN7 #2 SPWRN6 #2 SPWRN5 #2 SPWRN4 #2 SPWRN3 #2 SPWRN2 #2 SPWRN1 #2 F1265 SPWRN9 #2 F1266 ORARD#2 TLMD#2 LDT2D#2 LDT1D#2 SARD#2
  • Page 627B–63525EN/02 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1275 F1276 F1277 F1278 F1279 F1280 F1281 F1282 F1283 F1284 F1285 F1286 F1287 F1288 F1289 F1290 F1291 F1292 F1293 F1294 F1295 F1296 F1297 F1298 F1299 597
  • Page 6287. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1300 F1301 F1302 F1303 F1304 F1305 F1306 F1307 F1308 F1309 F1310 F1311 F1312 F1313 F1314 F1315 598
  • Page 629B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet function for Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B. 599
  • Page 6308. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET AND PCMCIA ETHERNET The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two types of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot to the l
  • Page 631B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.2 With the embedded Ethernet function, the following functions can be operated: LIST OF FUNCTIONS S FACTOLINK function S FOCAS1/Ethernet function S DNC1/Ethernet function S FTP file transfer function 8.2.1 With the FACTOLINK function, data can be displaye
  • Page 6328. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 H Absolute position H Relative position H Machine position H Remaining travel amount H Actual speed D NC program D Part program storage directory information D NC data file H Parameter H Tool offset value H Custom macro variable H Workpiece origin offset H
  • Page 633B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.2.3 The DNC1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotely DNC1/Ethernet control and monitor the CNC. The DNC1/Ethernet function provides software libraries in a simpler function call format when compared with Function the FOCAS1/Ethernet funct
  • Page 6348. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 Differences between the FOCAS1/Ethernet function and DNC1/Ethernet function Compared with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function, the DNC1/Ethernet function provides software libraries in a simpler function call format for frequently used functions. 604
  • Page 635B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.2.4 The FTP file transfer function transfers files with FTP. The function can FTP File Transfer read and punch NC programs and various types of NC data. Function NOTE The FTP file transfer function is usable with the control software for the embedded Ethe
  • Page 6368. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 NOTE 1 The embedded Ethernet function includes the FTP file transfer function. This function is almost equivalent to the NC data transfer function in the FTP mode of the Data Server function of the option board. 2 Compared with the option board, the embedde
  • Page 637B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.3 This section describes the setting of the parameters for the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/ SETTING THE 210is–B. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.3.1 This subsection describes the settings required to opera
  • Page 6388. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.3.1.2 On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating FACTOLINK parameter the FACTOLINK function. setting screen Display Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu ke
  • Page 639B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION PAGE 7 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE . If data is already registered, the data is displayed. 609
  • Page 6408. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 Display item and setting items Display item related to The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed. the embedded Ethernet Item Description function MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address Embedded Ethernet Set the TCP/IP–related items
  • Page 641B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.3.1.3 The NC parameters related to the FACTOLINK function are described Parameters below. Parameters 0802 Communicationchannel [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 21: Select the embedded Ethernet. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0810 MONO TIME BGS [Data type] Bit
  • Page 6428. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 0814 Trigger PMC address for logging [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 Set a PMC address that serves as a trigger for specifying logging data. 0815 Logging data transmission interval [Data type] Double–word [Unit of data] Seconds [Valid data ra
  • Page 643B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.3.1.4 An example of minimum setting required to operate the FACTOLINK Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network is provided below. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs function on a small through FACTOLINK. network D On Pe
  • Page 6448. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.3.1.5 When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network, Configuring a large consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and router IP address. network 8.3.2 This subsection describes the settings required to opera
  • Page 645B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.3.2.2 On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating FOCAS1/Ethernet the FOCAS1/Ethernet function. parameter setting screen Display Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the contin
  • Page 6468. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 If data is already registered, the data is displayed. 616
  • Page 647B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Display item and setting items Display item related to The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed. the embedded Ethernet Item Description function MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address Embedded Ethernet Set the TCP/IP–related items
  • Page 6488. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 NOTE 1 When a small value is set for the item of time interval, communication load increases, and the performance of the network can be adversely affected. 2 The parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are set to the following default values before shipment
  • Page 649B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.3.2.3 An example of minimum setting required to operate the Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs FOCAS1/Ethernet through FOCAS1/Ethernet. function on a sma
  • Page 6508. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.3.2.4 An example of minimum setting required to operate the DNC1/Ethernet Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs function on a small through DNC1/Ethernet. net
  • Page 651B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.3.2.5 When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network, Configuring a large consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and router IP address. network 8.3.3 This subsection describes the settings required to opera
  • Page 6528. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.3.3.2 On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating FTP file transfer the FTP file transfer function. parameter setting screen Display Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the co
  • Page 653B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION If data is already registered, the data is displayed. 623
  • Page 6548. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 Display item and setting items Display item related to The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed. the embedded Ethernet Item Description function MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address Embedded Ethernet Set the TCP/IP–related items
  • Page 655B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.3.3.3 The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are described Parameters below. Parameters 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 9: Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device. 09
  • Page 6568. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.3.3.4 An example of minimum setting required to operate the FTP file transfer Using the FTP file function on a small network is provided below. (Windows NT 4.0 Workstation is used as the OS for the personal computer.) transfer function on a In this exampl
  • Page 657B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.3.3.5 When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network, Configuring a large consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and router IP address. network 8.3.4 This subsection describes the method of parameter input
  • Page 6588. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 (b) Type 192.168.1.1 with the MDI keys. (c) Press the [INPUT] soft key or the function key INPUT to enter the data. This stores the parameter in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC. NOTE Turn on the power again so that you should make a changed parameter effe
  • Page 659B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Method of lowercase character input The method of entering lowercase characters when specifying a user name, password, and login DIR is described below. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen. 3 Move the cursor to
  • Page 6608. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 3 Move the cursor to LOGIN DIR with cursor keys. 4 Press the [STRING] soft key. The cursor position and soft key display change as shown below. 630
  • Page 661B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 5 Type ”/NCDATA/NCPROGRAM/LINE001/GROUP0” with the MDI keys, then press the [INPUT] soft key. 6 Next, type the remaining character string ”02” with the MDI keys, then press the [INPUT] soft key. [Tip] For example, even if the character string is divided int
  • Page 6628. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 7 To insert ”/FACTORY0010” between ”NCPROGRAM” and ”/LINE001”, move the cursor to ”/” prefixed to ”LINE001” then type ”/FACTORY0010” with the MDI keys. Finally, press the [INSERT] soft key. 8 To delete a character, move the cursor to the character to be del
  • Page 663B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Method of entering special characters The method of entering special characters such as ”\” unavailable with the MDI keys is described below. As an example, the procedure for setting the character string ”PROG$” is described. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in th
  • Page 6648. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 5 Press the [$] soft key. 6 Press the [INPUT] soft key. 634
  • Page 665B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.4 There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. SWITCHING Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices. BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES Procedure 1 Place the CNC i
  • Page 6668. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 5 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen for switching between the embedded Ethernet port and the PCMCIA Ethernet card appears. 6 Press the [PCMCIA] soft key. A confirmation message appears. Press the [EXEC] soft key to switch the device. NOTE Information
  • Page 667B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.5 This section describes the operation required of each embedded Ethernet function. EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS 8.5.1 The operation of the FACTOLINK function is described below. FACTOLINK Function Display Procedure 1 Press the function key MESSAGE . 2 Pr
  • Page 6688. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.5.2 The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below. FTP File Transfer Function 8.5.2.1 A list of the files held on the hard disk embedded to the host computer is Host file list display displayed. Procedure 1 Press the function key PROG
  • Page 669B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION NOTE Depending on the FTP server software, the number of displayed programs may differ between the host file list screen above and the host file list (detail) screen described below. 5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be
  • Page 6708. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 NOTE The host file list (detail) screen shown above is an example of screen display, and information displayed may vary according to the specification of the FTP server used with the host computer. Display items D Number of registered The number of files re
  • Page 671B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.5.2.2 When a list of the files held on the hard disk embedded to the host Host file search computer is displayed, a file can be placed at the start of the list by specifying its file number. Procedure 1 Display the host file list screen. 2 Press the [SEAR
  • Page 6728. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.5.2.4 A file (NC program) on the host computer can be read to the CNC NC program input memory. For the host file list screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Display the host file list screen. 3 Press the [READ] soft key. 4 Type the file numb
  • Page 673B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION For the program screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key PROG . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft
  • Page 6748. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 5 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 6 During output, ”OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. [Example of use] When an NC program (O0001) in the CNC memory is to be output to the hard disk embedded to the host computer, enter O0001. NOTE An outputt
  • Page 675B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.5.2.6 With the FTP file transfer function, the types of data listed below can be Input/output of various input/output. This subsection describes the input/output method. types of data A) NC parameter B) Tool offset value C) Custom macro variable D) Workpi
  • Page 6768. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 9 During output, ”OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. File name The fixed file name PRAMETER is used. File format, restrictions Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. Tool offset value input The file (to
  • Page 677B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION File name The fixed file name TOOLOFS is used. File format, restrictions Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. Workpiece origin offset value input The file (workpiece origin offset value) on the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. Procedure
  • Page 6788. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 Pitch error compensation input The file (pitch error compensation) on the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the sof
  • Page 679B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION M code group input The file (M code group) on the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press t
  • Page 6808. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 Operation history data input The file (operation history data) on the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft ke
  • Page 681B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.5.2.7 The host computer to which the FTP file transfer function attempts to Checking and changing make a connection as the current communication destination can be checked. of the connection host Procedure 1 Press the function key PROG . 2 Press the conti
  • Page 6828. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 NOTE The title of the host computer that is the current communication destination of the embedded Ethernet is displayed in reverse video. 5 The connected host can be changed by pressing the [CON–1], [CON–2], or [CON–3] soft key. Display items D Port number,
  • Page 683B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.6 If an error occurs with each function of the embedded Ethernet function, the error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function displays an EMBEDDED error message. ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE SCREEN Display Procedure 1 Press the function key MESSAGE . 2
  • Page 6848. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 PAGE 5 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE . [Tip] The latest error message is displayed at the top of the screen. To the right of an error message, the date and time data of the occurrence of the error is displayed. The format of date and tim
  • Page 685B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.7 With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen is available. EMBEDDED The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the ETHERNET embedded Ethernet function operates abnormally. MAINTENANCE SCREEN Display Procedure 1 P
  • Page 6868. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 6 The screen below is used to check the state of the communication cable and whether a communication destination exists. Enter the IP address of a communication destination through MDI keys, then press the [PING] soft key. Communication is performed three t
  • Page 687B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 7 The screen below is used to check the communication state of the embedded Ethernet function and the error detection count of the Ethernet controller. The screen consists of two pages: one page for an error detection count for transmission, and the other f
  • Page 6888. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8 The screen below is used to check the state of each task of the embedded Ethernet function. Symbol Meaning MASTER CTRL E Ethernet controller being initialized D Data being processed(NOTE) W Waiting for data processing(NOTE) P Waiting for parameter setting
  • Page 689B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Symbol Meaning PMC X Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initializa- tion D Data being processed(NOTE) W Waiting for data processing(NOTE) FTP X Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initializa- tion D Data being processed(NOTE) W Waiting
  • Page 6908. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.8 This section describes troubleshooting and check items associated with the embedded Ethernet function. TROUBLESHOOTING 8.8.1 1) Is an STP cable used for connection between the hub and embedded Check Items Related to Ethernet? Connection with the 2) Is t
  • Page 691B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 4) Is the length of the backbone cable 500 m or less? 5) Does the cable (transceiver cable) connecting a hub to a transceiver satisfy the specified length? S Usually, the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50 m. However, the maximum allowabl
  • Page 6928. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.8.4 This subsection describes how to check the state of communication Checking between the CNC and personal computer. Communication Checking the connection status and settings If communication with the CNC is not satisfactory or fails from time to time, c
  • Page 693B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 2) When no response is received (error) If no response is received from the CNC, the cause is considered to be a hardware connection error and/or software setting error. Check the hardware connection and software settings. Checking the influence of noise Th
  • Page 6948. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 2) Press the emergency stop button of the machine to turn off servo/spindle amplifier activation, then issue a ping command from the personal computer. 3) Count the number of lost packets (to which no response is returned). If lost packets occur in this sta
  • Page 695B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.9 If an error occurs with the embedded Ethernet function, the log screen of the embedded Ethernet function displays an error message. ERROR MESSAGES This section describes error messages displayed on the log screen. The major error messages are described
  • Page 6968. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 8.9.2 TCP PORT NUMBER(???) IS INVALID EMB_ETH The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect. Correct the TCP port number. FOCAS1/ETHER LOG Illegal Broadcast IP ADDRESS Screen The broadcast address for UDP transmission is incorrect. Correct the subne
  • Page 697B–63525EN/02 8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8.10 This section briefly describes Ethernet–related terms. The descriptions below provide minimum information only. For further GLOSSARY FOR information, refer to relevant publications available on the market. ETHERNET TCP/IP For Ethernet–based communicati
  • Page 6988. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63525EN/02 IP addresses are internationally managed systematically. This means that before an IP address can be used, the IP address must be obtained formally from the international organization. If the network used by a user is a local network closed within the user’
  • Page 699B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO 9 DIGITAL SERVO This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of digital servo and adjustment of reference position. 9.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . 670 9.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 9.3 ADJUST
  • Page 7009. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 9.1 This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is used for field adjustment of machine tool. INITIAL SETTING 1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition. SERVO PARAMETERS 2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3
  • Page 701B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO (2) Motor ID No. Select the motor ID No. of the servo motor to be used, according to the motor model and drawing number (the middle four digits of A06B–XXXX–BXXX) listed in the tables on subsequent pages. NOTE Servo axes are controlled in groups of two axes. So, for suc
  • Page 7029. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 - Linear motor Motor model 1500A/4 3000B/2 6000B/2 9000B/2 Motor specification 0410 0411 0412 0413 Motor type No. 90 91 92 93 Motor model 15000C/2 3000B/4 6000B/4 9000B/4 Motor specification 0414 0411–B811 0412–B811 0413–B811 Motor type No. 94 120 121 122 Motor model 15
  • Page 703B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO - αMi series servo motor Servo software series 9060 90B0 Motor model and motor type number αM2/5000i 162(262) A H αM3/5000i 165(265) A H αM8/4000i 185(285) A H αM12/4000i 188(288) A H αM22/4000i 215(315) A H αM30/4000i 218(318) A H αM40/4000i 222(322) A H - Linear motor
  • Page 7049. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 For aL series servo motor Model name a L3/3000 a L6/2000 a L9/3000 a L25/3000 a L50/2000 Drawing number 0561 0562 0564 0571 0572 Format number 56 or 68 57 or 69 58 or 70 59 60 For aC series servo motor Model name a C3/2000 a C6/2000 a C12/2000 a C22/1500 Drawing number
  • Page 705B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO (4) CMR PRM 1820 Command multiply ratio 1) When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27 Set value= 1 +100 CMR 2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48 Set value=2×CMR (5) Turn off the power then back on. (6) N/M of feed gear (F⋅FG) PRM 2084 n for flexible feed gear PRM 2085 m for flexible feed gear Setting
  • Page 7069. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 Setting for use of a separate detector (full–closed) Number of position pulses corresponding F⋅FG numerator (v 32767) to a predetermined amount of travel = (as irreducible fraction) F⋅FG denominator (v 32767) Number of position pulses corresponding to a predetermined am
  • Page 707B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO D Display The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB–based amplifier and axis information. This information can also be specified by the operator. 1. Press function key SYSTEM . 2. To display [FSSB], press continuous menu key several times. 3. Pressing soft key [FSSB] causes
  • Page 7089. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 D AXIS NO. (controlled axis number) The axis number of each controlled axis specified in parameters (Nos. 1920 to 1929) is displayed. If a number specified in these parameters falls outside the range of between 1 and the maximum number of controlled axes, 0 is displayed
  • Page 709B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO D M1 (connector number for pulse module 1) This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 1, specified in parameter No. 1931. D M2 (connector number for pulse module 2) This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 2, specified in parameter No. 19
  • Page 7109. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N00001 AXIS NAME EDITION TEST MAINTE–NO. 1 X 01A 010123 01 2 Y 01A 010123 01 3 Z 01A 010123 01 4 A 02B 010123 01 5 B 02B 010123 01 6 C 02B 010123 01 MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56 [ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ] The amplifier maintenance screen di
  • Page 711B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO CAUTION 1 For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB setting screen, do not attempt to enter values on the parameter screen using the MDI or a G10 command. Use only the FSSB screen to enter values for these parameters. 2 If pressing soft key [SET] results in a warni
  • Page 7129. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 2) Axis setting screen AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001 AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1–DSF Cs TNDM 1 X A1–L 0 0 0 0 1 2 Y A1–M 1 0 1 0 0 3 Z A2–L 0 0 0 1 0 4 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 2 5 B A3–M 0 0 0 0 0 6 C A4–L 0 0 0 0 0 >_ MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56 [SETTING][ ][ READ ][ ][ INPUT ] On the axis
  • Page 713B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO When soft key [SET] is pressed on the axis setting screen after data entry, the warning message “SPECIFIED DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” is displayed if any of the following conditions is satisfied. D Both M1 and M2 are nonzero for an axis. D Any two of TWO–AXES, Cs, and TANDEM
  • Page 7149. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 9.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN 9.2.1 Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen. Parameter Setting #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 SVS #0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed. 1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed. 9.2.2 1. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [SV. PARA
  • Page 715B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Alarm1 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA DGN (200) : #7 (OVL) : Overload alarm #6 (LV) : Insufficient voltage alarm #5 (OVC) : Overcurrent alarm #4 (HCA) : Abnormal current alarm #3 (HVA) : Excessive voltage alarm #2 (DCA) : Discharge alarm #1 (FBA)
  • Page 7169. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Alarm4 DTE CRC STB PRM DGN (203) : #7 (DTE) : Communication error of serial pulse coder. There is no response. Generally, a leading cause is a break in a wire. #6 (CRC) : Communication error of serial pulse coder. Transmitted data is in error. #5
  • Page 717B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO 9.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) 9.3.1 General Speed Rapid traverse (PRM1420α) FL rate (PRM1425 α ) Time Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (PRM1620 α ) *DECα PCZ Grid Grid shift amount Reference counter capacity (PRM1850) (PRM1821) 10mm/rev 10000P + Er
  • Page 7189. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PRM 1005 DLZ #1(DLZ) 0 : The normal method (dog) is used for reference position return. 1 : Reference position setting without dogs is used (axis by axis). NOTE A reference position can be set axis by axis by setting bit 1 of parameter No. 1002 t
  • Page 719B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO D Separate Type Pulse Coder or Linear Scale is Used PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P] Normally, the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set to the reference counter capacity. When plural reference marks are on a linear scale, a quotient of t
  • Page 7209. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 9.4 When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return, this function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set by DOGLESS MTB. REFERENCE When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position once POSITION SETTING set
  • Page 721B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO 9.4.3 Associated Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PRM 1002 DLZ #1(DLZ) 0 : Dog is used for reference position return 1 : Dogless reference position setting (all axes) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PRM 1005 DLZ #1(DLZ) 0 : The normal method (dog) is used for reference positi
  • Page 7229. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 9.5 αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE General The αi servo system can report the warning status before one of the following target alarms occurs. When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued. For example, this signal can be used by the machine for retracti
  • Page 723B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO A timing chart for handling a warning is shown below. Occurrence of a warning Servo amplifier SVWRN1–4 (Warning) Perform deceleration stop or block stop during this time period with the PMC to stop the machine without damage. The time period varies with the warning type
  • Page 7249. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 9.6 αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN General In the αi servo system, ID information output from each of the connected units is obtained and output to the CNC screen. The units that have ID information are shown below. (Remark: Some instances of these units do not have ID inf
  • Page 725B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO Displaying the servo ID screen 1 Press the SYSTEM function key, then press the [System] soft key. 2 Press the [SV Information] soft key to display the screen as shown below. NOTE Servo information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a difference between the servo inform
  • Page 7269. DIGITAL SERVO B–63525EN/02 Additional Information Even if replacement is performed reasonably such as for repairing, this function incorrectly indicates the * mark when it detects the replacement. To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to update the registered data, as described in the editi
  • Page 727B–63525EN/02 9. DIGITAL SERVO Screen operation Mode Key operation Use Viewing Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen–by–screen basis. (*1) Editing Soft key (*2) [INPUT] Replace the selected ID information at the cursor posi- tion with the character string in key–in buffer. [CANCEL] Deletes the char
  • Page 72810. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 10 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) This chapter outlines the serial interface and analog interface spindle amplifiers and explains related parameters. 10.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . 699 10.1.1Outline of Spindle Control . . . . .
  • Page 729B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control 699
  • Page 73010. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 S instruction M instruction NC PMC M03,M04,M05,M19 FIN *SSTP(Spindle stop) Motor speed SOVx( Spindle override) SF,GR1O,GR2O,GR3O (For machining center) GR1,GR2 (For lathe) S SOR( Orientation) (PRM 3735 to 3752) 0 1 R010 to R120 Orientation speed (PRM 37
  • Page 731B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.1.1.1 Method A of gear change Output Motor speed for machining center 4095 Max Gear 2 PRM 3736 Gear 3 Gear 1 PRM 3735 0 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 S code (min–1) 10.1.1.2 Method B of gear change Output Motor speed for machining 4095 Max center (PRM
  • Page 73210. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 10.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen 10.1.2.1 Display method (1) Confirm the parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 SPS Bit1 (SPS) 0 : The spindle tuning screen is not displayed. l 1 : The spindle tuning screen is displayed. (2) Press the SYSTEM ke
  • Page 733B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) D Spindle Select a spindle for which data is to be set. S11: Main spindle amplifier for the 1st spindle S12: Subspindle amplifier for the 1st spindle S21: Main spindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle S22: Subspindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle D Paramet
  • Page 73410. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 D Displayed parameters The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode. Spindle position- Normal Orientation Synchronization Rigid tapping Cs contour ing control operation control control Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional ga
  • Page 735B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.1.2.4 Spindle monitor screen SPINDLE MONITOR SCREEN ALARM : AL–27(POSITION CODER DIS.) OPERATION : Cs AXIS OONTROL SPINDLE SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM 0 50 100 150 200 LOAD METER (%) JJJJJ CONTROL INPUT : ORCM MRDY *ESP CONTROL OUTPUT :
  • Page 73610. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 D Operation Following 6 modes are available: a. Normal operation b. Orientation c. Synchronous operation d. Rigid tapping e. Cs contour cotrol f. Spindle positioning control D Load meter The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%. 1) Load met
  • Page 737B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.1.2.5 Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle tuning screen D Normal operation mode S11: S12: S21: S22: 1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub Proportional gain(HIGH) 4040 4206 4040 4206 Proportional gain (LOW) 4041 4207 4041 4207
  • Page 73810. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 D Synchronization control Numerals are parameter numbers : mode S11: S12: S21: S22: 1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub Proportional gain(HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210 Proportional gain(LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211 Integral gain(HIGH) 4052 4052 4214 4214 Integral
  • Page 739B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) D Spindle contouring Numerals are parameter numbers : control mode (Cs axis control) S11: S12: S21: S22: 1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub Proportional gain(HIGH) 4046 4046 Proportional gain (LOW) 4047 4047 Integral gain(HIGH) 4054 4054 Integral gain(LO
  • Page 74010. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 10.1.3 The standard parameters related to each motor model can be set Automatic Setting of automatically. Standard Parameters D The specifications for controlling a motor depend on the specifications defined by the machine tool builder. The parameters d
  • Page 741B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.1.4 Warning Interface for the αi Spindle Overview For the αi spindle, the warning state can be reported before an alarm is issued. When the warning state is entered, a report to the PMC is sent. For example, this signal can be used for retracting too
  • Page 74210. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 Warning Contents Details number 58 Converter main If the main circuit of the PSM is overloaded, the warn- circuit overloaded ing signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform proces- sing as needed. About
  • Page 743B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.1.5 αi Spindle Information Screen General In the αi spindle system, ID information output from each of the connected units is obtained and output to the CNC screen. The units that have ID information are shown below. (Remark: Some instances of these
  • Page 74410. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 Displaying the spindle information screen 1 Press the SYSTEM function key, then press the [SYSTEM] soft key. 2 Press the [SP–INF] soft key to display the screen as shown below. NOTE Spindle information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a difference be
  • Page 745B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) Additional Information Even if replacement is performed reasonably such as for repairing, this function incorrectly indicates the * mark when it detects the replacement. To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to update the registered data, as descr
  • Page 74610. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 Screen operation on the editing screen Mode Key operation Use Viewing Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen–by–screen basis. (*1) Editing Soft key (*2) [INPUT] Replace the selected ID information at the cursor posi- tion with the character string in k
  • Page 747B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.2 AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) 10.2.1 Outline of Spindle Control 717
  • Page 74810. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 10.2.1.1 Block diagram S command M command PMC NC M03 to M05, M06, M19 CW/CCW command, Spindle speed orientation, etc. conversion FIN Miscellaneous function end Motor speed *SSTP Gear 1 Gear 2 Spindle stop GR1O, GR2O, GR3O Gear selection (16M/18M) GR1,
  • Page 749B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.2.1.2 Calculation of S analog voltage and related parameters [M series] 1 Gear change method A (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 0) SVC Motor speed Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 (4095) 10V Max PRM 3736 PRM 3735 0V S code 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (min–1) 2 Gear c
  • Page 75010. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 TCW CWM TCW CWM Sign of output voltage 0 0 Analog voltage (+) with both M03 and M04 0 1 Analog voltage (–) with both M03 and M04 1 0 (+) with M03, (–) with M04 1 1 (–) with M03, (+) with M04 [M series] #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #
  • Page 751B–63525EN/02 10. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 10.2.1.3 Tuning S analog voltage (D/A converter) (1) For M series, change the upper and lower limits as follows: ⋅ When gear change method A is used: Parameter 3736 = 4095, parameter 3735 = 0 ⋅ When gear change method B is used: Parameter 3751 = 4095, p
  • Page 75210. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63525EN/02 (4) If the output voltage is not correct, perform the following calculation, and change the value of parameter 3730 to adjust the gain of the D/A converter: Setting + 10V (Current value of PRM 3730) Measured voltage (5) Execute an S command again and co
  • Page 753B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure. 11.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . 725 11.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . 727 11.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . 731 11
  • Page 75411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.25 ALARM 5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) . . . . . . . 791 11.26 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 11.27 ALARMS 910 AND 911 (SRAM PARITY) . . . . . . 796 11.28 ALARMS 912 TO 919 (DRAM PARITY) . . . . . . . 799 11.29 ALARMS 920 AND 9
  • Page 755B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.1 When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind of failure occured and take appropriate action, to promptly recover the CORRECTIVE machine. ACTION FOR Check for the failure according to the following procedure : FAILURES When? With what What f
  • Page 75611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 ⋅ For a failure related to spindles When did the failure occur ? (during power–on, acceleration, deceleration, or constant rotation) 3 What failure occurred ? ⋅ Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen? (Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred f
  • Page 757B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.2 NO MANUAL OPERA- TION NOR AUTOMAT- IC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED Points (1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic operation is done (2) Check whether position display shows correct position (3) Check CNC status display (4) Check CNC internal
  • Page 75811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 (c) Confirm the status of modes Operation mode status is displayed on the lower part of CRT as follows : If nothing is displayed, mode select signal is not input. Check mode select signal using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN). For details, refer to section 1.9 CNC
  • Page 759B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition) DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 In–position width 1) Check the parameters according to th
  • Page 76011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN) 0% #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0 G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8 When the override is 0% all bits of the above address b
  • Page 761B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE Points (1) Check whether position display is operating. (2) Check CNC status display. (3) Check internal status using Diagnostic funciton. Causes and Remedies 1. Position display (1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not select
  • Page 76211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 * By defining a straight line or arc in the CNC beforehand using the R area of the PMC, +Jg and "Ja allow the tool to move along both X– and Y–axes simultaneously. The exchange of information with the R area of the PMC is performed by the macro software or PMC sequen
  • Page 763B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition) DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 In–positio width 1) Check the parameters according to the
  • Page 76411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN) 0% #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0 G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8 When the override is 0% all bits of the above address b
  • Page 765B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE Causes and actions If manual handle operation cannot be performed, the probable causes include the following: D The servo is not activated. D Manual pulse generators are not connected properly to the I/O module. D The I/O link of t
  • Page 76611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 (2) Manual pulse generator failures When rotated, a manual pulse generator generates the signals shown below. Using an oscilloscope, measure the signals from the screw terminal block located at the rear of a manual pulse generator. If no signals are output, measure t
  • Page 767B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING I/O module for connec- Group 0 Control unit tor panel This manual pulse Allocated to generator I/F is use a manual effective. pulse generator Operator’s panel I/O module Group 1 Allocated to use a manual This manual pulse pulse generator generator I/F is not effective
  • Page 76811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 4 Checking the parameters (1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the CRT. and input signals (See Section 1.9.) When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct. If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the mode sele
  • Page 769B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING (3) Manual handle feed multiplication is not correct Check the following signals using PMC’s PCDGN. Also confirm the following parameters based on the parameter list. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0019 MP2 MP1 In handle mode, the travel distance per step can be changed. MP
  • Page 77011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE Points (1) Check manual operation is possible. (2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operator’s manual. (3) Check status of CNC. Causes and Remedies When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasur
  • Page 771B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 2. When an automatic CNC’s status display shows “STRT” on the CRT. operation is in progress (1) Check the contents of diagnostic nos. 000 to 015. (Cycle start LED is lit) No. Message Display a. 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL : 1(Example) b. 001 MOTION :0 c. 002 DWELL :0 d
  • Page 77211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0005 BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN #0(MFIN) : M function finish signal #2(SFIN) : S function finish signal #3(TFIN) : T function finish signal #4(BFIN) : 2nd auxiliary function finish signal #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0007 BF TF SF MF #0(MF) :
  • Page 773B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING Signal End state Finish signal 0 1 store signal 0 1 b. Travel command is being CNC is reading an axis command (X,Y,Z,...) in a program and giving the executed command to the axis. c. A dwell command is CNC is reading a dwell command (G04) in a program and is executing
  • Page 77411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 f. Interlock signal or start lock signal is input Start lock signal is input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0007 STLK #1 (STLK) With this signal being 1, start lock signal is input. There are a plural number of interlock fu
  • Page 775B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0110 MDTCH8 MDTCH7 MDTCH6 MDTCH5 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1 When signal MDTHn is “1”, the axis detach function is in valid. The control axis detach function becomes valid by the following signal issued from the PMC or a CNC side parameter. Ch
  • Page 77611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is [1111 . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . 0000]. *JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override 1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00% 1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01% : 1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00% : 0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34% 0000 000
  • Page 777B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING (c) Thread cutting does not operate 1) Position coder does not rotate Check the connection between spindle and position coder The following failure is considered: ⋅ Timing belt is broken ⋅ Key is removed ⋅ Coupling is loose ⋅ Connector of signal cable is loosened 2) P
  • Page 77811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF Points (1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows: (2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operator’s panel. (3) Confirm CNC’s diagnostic function. Causes and Remedies The reason why cycle start LED
  • Page 779B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING b. External reset signal is input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0008 ERS #7(ERS) : When the bit is 1, external reset signal is input. This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M02 when an M02 is specified in a program as the end of a program. Therefore, when
  • Page 78011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON Causes and actions If nothing is displayed on the LCD at power–up or if the LCD is locked with “GRAPHIC IS READY.” or the slot status screen displayed, the probable causes include the following: D For t
  • Page 781B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D LCD display Referring to the hardware chapter, check the LCD on/off status of the motherboard. If the motherboard has started up normally and the LCD display indicates normal operation, a probable cause is a fault of the display system, such as a cable not connected
  • Page 78211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 [For the stand–alone type] D Power supply of the LCD Check that the power cable is connected to the connector CP1A of the unit LCD unit. Connector for connecting the backlight cable Inverter printed circuit board Connector for connecting the LCD cable LCD control pri
  • Page 783B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D Main CPU board If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the main CPU board and the CPU card. D Installation positions of the display control card and the CPU card CPU card Display control card 753
  • Page 78411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.8 THE DISPLAY ON THE LCD UNIT FLASHES Causes and actions This situation can occur only with the stand–alone type. If a break is detected in the optical cable (HSSB) that connects the LCD unit to the main CPU board, the display on the LCD unit flashes. The same sit
  • Page 785B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.9 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES CANNOT BE PERFORMED INPUT/ OUTPUT CANNOT BE PERFORMED PROPERLY Causes and actions If the I/O Link is not established, if the signals from an I/O device cannot be input normally to the CNC, or if the signals from the CNC cannot
  • Page 78611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 D Checking the power Check that the connected I/O devices are connected properly to the power supplies of the I/O supplies and that the voltages are as prescribed. devices Check that the power–on sequence is correct. Time at which an I/O device is to be turned on Bef
  • Page 787B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT TO AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS If data is input to an invalid address in a connector panel I/O unit (for example, data that should be input to X004 is actually input to X010 in a connector panel I/O unit), the most likely c
  • Page 78811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.11 The most likely cause is that power is not being supplied to the expansion unit. IN A CONNECTOR → Check whether 24–V power is supplied to 18P and 50P of the PANEL I/O UNIT, NO expansion unit, DI and DO signals are not input and output. DATA IS OUTPUT TO → Check
  • Page 789B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.12 ALARM 85 TO 87 (READER/PUNCHER (START) INTERFACE ALARM) YES Alarm 85? NO · Check baud rate and other I/O pa rameters YES · I/O device is Alarm 86? faulty NO Is I/O NO parameter correct? YES Set correct parameters OFF Is power of I/O ? ON Turn on I/O device Is ca
  • Page 79011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 Value of parame- ter 0020 0 1 2 3 Function Feed 0101#7 0111#7 0121#7 0131#7 Data input code 0101#3 0111#3 0121#3 0131#3 Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0 0121#0 0131#0 Type of I/O device 102 112 122 132 Baud rate 103 113 123 133 Commu- 0135#3 – – – 0 1 nication meth
  • Page 791B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 0102 Type of I/O device 0112 0122 Value TYPE OF I/O DEVICE 0132 0 RS–232–C (if the following units are not used) 1 FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2 (bubble cassette) 2 FANUC CASSETTE F1 (Old type FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAP- TOR) 3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR FANUC FL
  • Page 79211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0135 RMS R42 PRA ETX ASC #7(RMS) In protocol A, status of remote / tape operation of SAT command is 0 : Always transmitted by 0. 1 : Transmitted by the contents of remote / tape switching request issued by SET command from the CNC. #3(R42) 0 :
  • Page 793B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING < Cable connection> R232C (JD36A) (JD36B) (JD5L) Punch panel RD (01) (03) RD 0V (02) DR (03) (06) DR 0V (04) CS (05) (05) CS 0V (06) CD (07) (08) CD 0V (08) (09) +24V (10) SD (11) (02) SD 0V (12) ER (13) (20) ER 0V (14) RS (15) (04) RS 0V (16) (07) SG (17) (18) +24V (
  • Page 79411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 CAUTION 1 When CS is not used, connect it to RS. 2 For protocol A or extended protocol A: When DR is not used, connect it to ER. Always connect CD to ER. RS422 (JD6A) (JD6L) Host computer RD (01) (04) RD *RD (02) (22) *RD RT (03) (17) TT *RT (04) (35) *TT CS (05) (07
  • Page 795B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.13 ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) Contents Reference position return was executed when the following condition is not satisfied: The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis is moving to the reference position at a speed hi
  • Page 79611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 (1) Check whether the motor ratated more than one rota- tion (one rotation signal is issued ) at faster than 128 pulses of position error amount. NO Return start position is too close Rotated ? · Chagne the return start position. YES · Move the machine at faster that
  • Page 797B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.14 Absolute position data in the serial pulse coder was lost. (This alarm will be generated when serial pulse coder is exchanged or ALARM 300 position feedback signal cable of the serial pulse coder is disconnected). (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) Remedies
  • Page 79811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.15 ALARM 401 (V READY OFF) Causes and actions This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo amplifier does not turn on or if the signal turns off during operation. There are cases in which this alarm is issued because another servo alarm is issu
  • Page 799B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D Example of connection around the amplifier (Typical example) (servo (servo amplifier) amplifier) Control power supply Emergency stop circuit Serial spindle Servo Servo Spindle motor motor motor 3–phase Breaker AC reactor Single– phase Breaker Check items D Is the PS
  • Page 80011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 D Installation positions of the axis control cards [For the LCD–mounted type] Axis control card Motherboard Axis control card Sub–CPU board Axis control card Loader control board 770
  • Page 801B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING [For the stand–alone type] Axis control card Axis control card Main CPU board Sub CPU board Axis control card Loarder control board 771
  • Page 80211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.16 ALARM 404 (V READY ON) Causes and actions This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo amplifier remains on. The servo amplifier or the axis control cards on the CNC may be defective. D VRDY CNC Servo amplifier (main CPU board) MCON: From th
  • Page 803B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D Installation positions of the axis control cards [For the LCD–mounted type] Axis control card Motherboard Axis control card Sub–CPU board Axis control card Loader control board 773
  • Page 80411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 [For the stand–alone type] Axis control card Axis control card Main CPU board Sub CPU board Axis control card Loarder control board 774
  • Page 805B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.17 ALARM 462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED) ALARM 463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED) Causes and actions Alarm 462 is issued if a slave (servo amplifier) cannot receive correct data due to an FSSB communication error. Alarm 463 is issued if the CNC cannot receive correct data due
  • Page 80611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 D Installation positions of the axis control cards [For the LCD–mounted type] Axis control card Motherboard Axis control card Sub–CPU board Axis control card Loader control board 776
  • Page 807B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING [For the stand–alone type] Axis control card Axis control card Main CPU board Sub CPU board Axis control card Loarder control board 777
  • Page 80811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.18 Digital servo parameters are abnormal. (Digital servo parameters are set incorrectly.) ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) D Causes 1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters: PRM 2020 : Motor format number PRM 2022 : Motor rotation direct
  • Page 809B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.19 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) Causes and actions This alarm is issued if the ambient temperature of the CNC control unit is abnormally high. As an installation condition, the ambient temperature of the CNC must not exceed 58°C (for LCD–mounted type CNC) or
  • Page 81011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.20 ALARM 701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a fault occurs in any of the fan motors, such as the stoppage of a fan motor during the operation of the CNC. D Fan motors Fan motors are installed in the uppermost portion of the CNC co
  • Page 811B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING [For the stand–alone type] For the stand–alone type, a fan can be replaced together with its case. Fan motor for Fan motor for 2–slot track 1–slot track Specifications of fan motors Ordering information For 1–slot track A02B–0265–C101 For 2–slot track A02B–0260–C021 7
  • Page 81211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.21 Spindle speed changes abnormally due to load. ALARM 704 (SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ALARM) Remedies Check whether spindle speed is constant by view of the speed meter on CRT. YES Constant ? NO Is a heavy cutting being per- formed ? Confirm spindle load
  • Page 813B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.22 ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) Causes and actions An error occurred in the communication between the serial spindle amplifier (SPM) and the CNC. The probable causes include: D Contact failure of the connection cable D Defective printed circuit bo
  • Page 81411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.23 ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK STARTUP FAILURE) Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a serial spindle amplifier (SPM) does not enter the normal startup state when the CNC is turned on. This alarm is not issued once the CNC system including the spindle amp
  • Page 815B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING [Diagram of connection of three or four amplifiers per path] Motherboard (Main CPU board) Sub–CPU board Connector panel SPM (first) JA41 JA48 JA7A–1 JA7B JA7A–2 JA7A SPM (second) JA7B JA7A SPM (third) JA7B JA7A SPM (fourth) JA7B JA7A Check that the cables are connecte
  • Page 81611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 S2E: 0 : The second spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup. 1 : The second spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle serial control startup. S1E: 0 : The first spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup. 1 : The fir
  • Page 817B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.24 ALARM 5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT) ALARM 5135 (FSSB: ERROR MODE) ALARM 5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR) ALARM 5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT) ALARM 5198 (FSSB: ID DATA NOT READ) Causes and actions These alarms are issued if any of the axis control cards and the s
  • Page 81811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 If the FSSB does not become ready to open in 4, alarm 5134 is issued. If an error is detected in 5, alarm 5137 is issued. If the FSSB does not open within a fixed period of time, alarm 5197 is issued. If the ready signal is not returned within a fixed period of time,
  • Page 819B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D Installation positions of the axis control cards [For the LCD–mounted type] Axis control card Motherboard Axis control card Sub–CPU board Axis control card Loader control board 789
  • Page 82011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 [For the stand–alone type] Axis control card Axis control card Main CPU board Sub CPU board Axis control card Loarder control board 790
  • Page 821B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.25 ALARM 5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) Causes and actions The number of servo amplifiers recognized by the FSSB is insufficient, compared with the number of controlled axes. D FSSB setting screen If this alarm is issued, display the amplifier setting screen
  • Page 82211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 D Installation positions of the axis control cards [For the LCD–mounted type] Axis control card Motherboard Axis control card Sub–CPU board Axis control card Loader control board 792
  • Page 823B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING [For the stand–alone type] Axis control card Axis control card Main CPU board Sub CPU board Axis control card Loarder control board 793
  • Page 82411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.26 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY) Causes and actions A ROM parity error occurred. The software including the CNC system software, servo software, PMC management software, and PMC Ladder is stored in the flash memory on the FROM/SRAM module. It starts execution after being
  • Page 825B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING [For the stand–alone type] FROM/SRAM module The FROM/SRAM module is installed under the axis control card. Main CPU board 795
  • Page 82611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.27 ALARMS 910 AND 911 (SRAM PARITY) Causes and actions A parity error occurred in the SRAM used to store data such as parameters and machining programs. This alarm is issued if the battery has run down or if the data in the SRAM is destroyed due to some external c
  • Page 827B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D Installation position of the FROM/SRAM module [For the LCD–mounted type] FROM/SRAM module [For the stand–alone type] FROM/SRAM module The FROM/SRAM module is installed under the axis control card. Main CPU board 797
  • Page 82811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 D SRAM parity on the If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that an SRAM parity error loader control board or occurred on the loader or Symbol CAPi T, take appropriate action on the Symbol CAPi T board loader control board or Symbol CAPi T board. The SRAM f
  • Page 829B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.28 ALARMS 912 TO 919 (DRAM PARITY) Causes and actions The management software for the CNC is loaded from the FROM to the DRAM at power on, so that it is executed on the DRAM. A parity error occurred on this DRAM. These alarms occur if the data on the DRAM is destro
  • Page 83011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 [For the stand–alone type] CPU card Main CPU board D DRAM parity on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a DRAM parity error option board occurred on an option board, take appropriate action on the option board on which the DRAM parity error occur
  • Page 831B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.29 ALARMS 920 AND 921 (SERVO ALARMS) Causes and actions A watchdog error or RAM parity error occurred in the circuit on an axis control card. Alarm 920 indicates that either of the above errors occurred in the control circuit for axes 1 to 4. Alarm 921 indicates th
  • Page 83211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 [For the stand–alone type] CPU card Axis control card Main CPU board 802
  • Page 833B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D Servo alarm on the If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a servo alarm occurred sub–CPU board or loader on the sub–CPU or loader, take appropriate action on the sub–CPU board control board or loader control board. Screen display example SYSTEM ALARM
  • Page 83411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 [For the stand–alone type] CPU card CPU card Axis control card Axis control card Sub CPU board Loarder control board 804
  • Page 835B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.30 ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM) Causes and actions A fault occurred on the FSSB (serial servo bus) that connects servo amplifiers to the CNC. This alarm is issued if a fault occurs in any of the axis control cards making up the FSSB, optical cables, and servo amplifiers.
  • Page 83611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 D Identifying the defective Use the display on the CNC screen location If alarm 926 is issued, information such as the following is displayed at the bottom of the CNC screen. It can be used to identify the defective location. MODE STATUS information information Bits
  • Page 837B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING If the pattern of the STATUS information is A (1) The optical cable that connects together the slave corresponding to bits 12 to 15 of the MODE information and the preceding slave may be defective. Or, either of the slaves connected together with that optical cable ma
  • Page 83811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 D Installation position of the axis control card [For the LCD–mounted type] Axis control card Motherboard [For the stand–alone type] Axis control card Main CPU board 808
  • Page 839B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D FSSB alarm on the If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that an FSSB alarm sub–CPU board or loader occurred on the sub–CPU or loader, take appropriate action on the control board sub–CPU board or loader control board. Screen display example SYSTEM ALARM 9
  • Page 84011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 [For the stand–alone type] Axis control card Axis control card Sub CPU board Loarder control board 810
  • Page 841B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.31 ALARM 930 (CPU INTERRUPT) Causes and actions An interrupt that can never be generated during normal operation was generated. The cause of the fault cannot be identified, but the fault may have occurred in the peripheral circuit of the CPU. If the problem is solv
  • Page 84211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 [For the stand–alone type] CPU card Main CPU board D Examining the noise See the section on the measures against noise, examine the noise environment environment of the CNC. D CPU interrupt on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a CPU interrupt w
  • Page 843B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.32 ALARM 935 (SRAM ECC ERROR) Causes and actions An ECC error occurred in the SRAM used to store data such as parameters and machining programs. This alarm is issued if the battery has run down or if the data in the SRAM is destroyed due to some external cause. Or,
  • Page 84411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 D Installation position of the FROM/SRAM module [For the LCD–mounted type] FROM/SRAM module [For the stand–alone type] FROM/SRAM module The FROM/SRAM module is installed under the axis control card. Main CPU board 814
  • Page 845B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.33 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a fault is detected in the PMC. The probable causes include an I/O link communication error and a defective PMC control circuit D Connecting the I/O Link The I/O Link is a serial interface t
  • Page 84611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 1) If bit 0 of the binary representation of xx is “1”, this indicates that the master station (CNC) received invalid communication data. For example, assume that the following is displayed on the screen: SYSTEM ALARM 950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM PC050 IOLINK CH1 aabb–4142:aa
  • Page 847B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING In this case, check the following: (1) If bit 5 of yy is “1” Perform examination with the same procedure as that in 1). (2) If bit 6 of yy is “1” or if bit 7 of yy is “1” First, replace the device of the slave station of the indicated group number. If the problem is n
  • Page 84811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.34 ALARM 951 (PMC WATCHDOG ALARM) Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a fault (watchdog alarm) is detected in the PMC. A probable cause is that the MC control circuit is defective. D Replacing the The PMC control circuit is installed on the motherboard. Rep
  • Page 849B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.35 ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM ON AN OPTION BOARD) Causes and actions This alarm indicates that an error was detected on an option board, not on the main CPU board. D Screen display If alarm 972 is issued, the following is displayed on the screen: Screen display example S
  • Page 85011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.36 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM WITH AN UNKNOWN CAUSE) Causes and actions An error that can never occur during normal operation occurred. The cause of the error cannot be identified. D Replacing printed circuit Replace all the printed circuit boards installed (including c
  • Page 851B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.37 ALARM 974 (F–BUS ERROR) Causes and actions A bus error occurred on the FANUC–BUS connecting each option board. This alarm indicates that a fault occurred during the exchange of data between the main CPU and an option board. D Replacing the CPU card Replace the C
  • Page 85211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 D Installation position of the CPU card [For the LCD–mounted type] CPU card Motherboard [For the stand–alone type] CPU card Main CPU board 822
  • Page 853B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D F–BUS error on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that an F–BUS error option board occurred on an option board, replace the CPU card on the option board on which the F–BUS error occurred or the option board itself. Some option boards have a circuit
  • Page 85411. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.38 ALARM 975 (BUS ERROR) Causes and actions A bus error occurred on the motherboard. This alarm indicates that an error occurred during the exchange of data within the motherboard. D Replacing the CPU card Replace the CPU card on the motherboard. D Replacing other
  • Page 855B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.39 ALARM 976 (LOCAL BUS ERROR) Causes and actions A bus error occurred on the local bus on the motherboard. This alarm indicates that an error occurred during the exchange of data within the motherboard. D Replacing the CPU card Replace the CPU card on the motherbo
  • Page 85611. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.40 For an explanation of the following servo alarms, refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual (B–65285EN) or SERVO ALARMS FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series Maintenance Manual (B–65165E). Number Message Contents 417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – PA- This ala
  • Page 857B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING Number Message Contents 439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT POWER 1) PSM: The DC link voltage is too high. 2) PSMR: The DC link voltage is too high. 3) α series SVU: The C link voltage is too high. 4) β series SVU: The link voltage is too high. 440 n AXIS : CNV. EX DECELERATIO
  • Page 85811. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT FSSB communication was disconnected suddenly. The possible causes are as follows: 1) The FSSB communication cable was disconnected or broken. 2) The power to the amplifier was turned off suddenly. 3) A low–voltage
  • Page 859B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING D Installation positions of the axis control cards [For the LCD–mounted type] Axis control card Motherboard Axis control card Sub–CPU board Axis control card Loader control card 829
  • Page 86011. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 [For the stand–alone type] Axis control card Axis control card Main CPU board Sub CPU board Axis control card Loarder control board 830
  • Page 861B–63525EN/02 11.TROUBLESHOOTING 11.41 For an explanation of the following SPC alarms (serial pulse coder alarms), refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance SPC ALARMS Manual (B–65285EN) or FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series Maintenance Manual (B–65165E). Number Message Contents 360 n AXIS: ABNORM
  • Page 86211. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63525EN/02 11.42 For an explanation of the following spindle alarms, refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual (B–65285EN) or SPINDLE ALARMS FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series Maintenance Manual (B–65165E). Number Contents 7101 to 7199 Spindle 1 alarm (SPM display 01
  • Page 863APPENDI
  • Page 864
  • Page 865B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST A ALARM LIST A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES (CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 A.2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . 912
  • Page 866A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES (CNC) (1) Program errors /Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm) Number Message Contents 000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power. 001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incor
  • Page 867B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 023 ILLEGAL RADIUS COMMAND In circular interpolation by radius designation, negative value was com- (T series) manded for address R. Modify the program. 025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN G02/G03 F0 (fast feed) was instructed by F1 –digit column feed
  • Page 868A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 039 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN NRC Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start–up, a cancel, or (T series) switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose radius compensation. The program may cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner
  • Page 869B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR In the arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R block, the move distance (M series) is less than chamfer or corner R amount. 055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is
  • Page 870A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 069 FORMAT ERROR IN G70–G73 The final move command in the blocks specified by P and Q of G70, (T series) G71, G72, and G73 ended with chamfering or corner R. Modify the program. 070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient
  • Page 871B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 085 COMMUNICATION ERROR When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is in
  • Page 872A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit opera- tion. If this alarm has occurred, press while pressing , and only the program being edited will be deleted. Register the deleted pr
  • Page 873B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME NC and custom macro commands coexist. BLOCK Modify the program. 128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to NUMBER 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the p
  • Page 874A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was specified as the life count type in the extended tool life management. 150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value. Modify the program. 151
  • Page 875B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents IMPROPER G–CODE IN G107 Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified in the cylindrical (M series) interpolation mode was specified. 1) G codes for positioning: G28,, G73, G74, G76, G81 – G89, including the codes specifying the ra
  • Page 876A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In the constant surface speed control, the axis specification is wrong. (See parameter No. 3770.) The specified axis command (P) contains an illegal value. Correct the program. 194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour contro
  • Page 877B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Movement is commanded for the axis to be synchronously controlled. SYNCHRO–MODE Any of the following alarms occurred in the operation with the simple (M series) synchronization control. 1) The program issued the move
  • Page 878A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 Any of the following errors occurred in the specified format at the pro- grammable–parameter input. 1 Address N or R was not entered. 2 A number not specified for a parameter was entered. 3 The axis number w
  • Page 879B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 251 ATC ERROR This alarm is issued in the following cases: (M series) S An M06T_ command contains an unusable T code. S An M06 command has been specified when the Z machine coordi nate is positive. S The parameter for the current tool numbe
  • Page 880A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 4511 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In a circular punching (G46, G47) command, the same position was CIRCLE-PUNCH specified for both start and end points of the arc, radius (R) of the arc was set to zero, or the pitch (Q) was set to a value exceeding t
  • Page 881B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 4543 MULTI-PIECE Q COMMAND Although G98P0 was specified, the Q value for the G74 command was ERROR not 1 or 3. Although G98K0 was specified, the Q value for the G73 command was not 1 or 2. 4544 MULTI-PIECE RESTART ERROR In the command for r
  • Page 882A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 5011 PARAMETER ZERO(CUT MAX) The maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422, No. 1430, No. (M series) 1431, No. 1432) is 0 in the HPCC mode. 5012 G05 P10000 ILLEGAL START UP Function category: (HPCC) High–precision contour control (M seri
  • Page 883B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING Three–dimensional coordinate conversion G68 has been specified (M series) three or more times. TOO MANY G68 NESTING Three–dimensional coordinate conversion G68.1 has been specified (T series) three or more times. 5
  • Page 884A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 5060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN There is a parameter setting error. G02.3/G03.3 Parameter No. 5641 (setting of the linear axis) is not set. (M series) The axis set in parameter No. 5641 is not a linear axis. Parameter No. 5642 (setting of a rotat
  • Page 885B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5085 SMOOTH IPL ERROR 1 A block for specifying smooth interpolation contains a syntax error. 5096 MISMATCH WAITING M–CODE Different wait codes (M codes) were specified in HEAD1 and HEAD2. (M series) Correct the program. 5110 NOT STOP POSITI
  • Page 886A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation command has an error. (M series) Specifically, this error is caused by one of the following: 1) L = 0 is specified. 2) Q = 0 is specified. 3) R/, R/, C is specif
  • Page 887B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5195 DIRECTION CAN NOT BE JUDGED When the touch sensor with a single contact signal input is used in the (T series) direct input B function for tool offset measurement values, the stored pulse direction is not constant. One of the following
  • Page 888A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 5227 FILE NOT FOUND A specified file is not found during communication with the built–in Handy File. 5228 SAME NAME USED There are duplicate file names in the built–in Handy File. 5229 WRITE PROTECTED A floppy disk in the built–in Handy Fil
  • Page 889B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR A touch panel error occurred. Cause: 1. The touch panel is kept pressed. 2. The touch panel was pressed when power was turned on. Remove the above causes, and turn on the power again. 5306 MODE CHANGE ERROR In a one–t
  • Page 890A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 5407 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G41.3 1) A G code that belongs to group 01 except G00 and G01 is specified (M series) in G41.3 mode. 2) An offset command (a G code belonging to group 07) is specified in G41.3 mode. 3) The block next to G41.3 (start
  • Page 891B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5445 CRC:MOTION IN G39 (M series) Corner circular interpolation (G39) of cutter compensation is not speci- fied alone but is specified with a move command. 5446 CRC:NO AVOIDANCE (M series) Because there is no interference evade vector, the
  • Page 892A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 (2) Background edit alarm Number Message Contents ??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same number as the P/S alarm that occurs in ordinary program edit. (070, 071, 072, 073, 074 085,086,087 etc.) 140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in the backg
  • Page 893B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST (5) Serial pulse coder (SPC) alarms No. Message Description 360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CHECKSUM A checksum error occurred in the built–in pulse coder. (INT) 361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE DATA A phase data error occurred in the built–in pulse coder. (INT) 362 n AXIS : ABN
  • Page 894A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 203 DTE CRC STB PRM #7 (DTE) : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error. The pulse coder, feedbak cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NC–axis board #6 (CRC) : The ser
  • Page 895B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 415 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EX- A speed higher than 524288000 units/s was attempted to be set in the CESS SHIFT n–th axis (axis 1–8). This error occurs as the result of improperly set CMR. 417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – PA- This alarm occurs
  • Page 896A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Contents 438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMAL CUR- 1) SVM: The motor current is too high. RENT 2) α series SVU: The motor current is too high. 3) β series SVU: The motor current is too high. 439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT POWER 1) PSM: The DC link voltage is too
  • Page 897B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT FSSB communication was disconnected suddenly. The possible causes are as follows: 1) The FSSB communication cable was disconnected or broken. 2) The power to the amplifier was turned off suddenly. 3) A low–volta
  • Page 898A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 201 ALD EXP When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 400 is being generated): #7 (ALD) 0 : Motor overheating 1 : Amplifier overheating When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 416 is being generated):
  • Page 899B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 514 INTERFERENCE : +n The rotation area interference check function found interference on the plus side of the n axis. 515 INTERFERENCE : –n The rotation area interference check function found interference on the minus side of the n axis. N
  • Page 900A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 (11)Serial spindle alarms Number Message Contents 749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR It is serial communication error while system is executing after power supply on. Following reasons can be considered. 1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cable
  • Page 901B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST D The details of spindle alarm No.750 D 1st and 2nd spindles #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 409 SPE S2E S1E SHE #3 (SPE) 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters fulfill the spindle unit startup conditions. 1 : In the spindle serial control, the s
  • Page 902A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 (12)Safety zone alarms Number Message Contents 4800 ZONE : PUNCHING INHIBITED 1 When a safety zone check was executed, a punch command was specified in area 1 where punching is inhibited. 4801 ZONE : PUNCHING INHIBITED 2 When a safety zone check was executed, a pu
  • Page 903B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 4871 AUTO SETTING PIECES ERROR In safety zone auto setting, the safety zone pieces are not correct. Or the position detector has gone wrong, please tell your machine tool builder. 4872 AUTO SETTING COMMAND M code, S code or T code is specif
  • Page 904A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Number Message Description 972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER MOD- An NMI occurred on a board other than the motherboard. ULE The option board may be faulty. 973 NON MASK INTERRUPT An NMI occurred as a result of an unknown cause. 974 F–BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the
  • Page 905B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST A.2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) (1) PMC ALARMS/SYSTEM ALARMS (PMC–SB7) Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR 1) Re–input the sequence program. The sequence program is invalid. 2) Replace the master printed circuit board. ER02 PRO
  • Page 906A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is inval- (xxxx) management software. id. (The series of BASIC and OPTION do not match.) ER13 OPTION AREA ERROR Contact
  • Page 907B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS Modify the sequence program. Change An out–of–range parameter number is OUT OF RANGE the parameter number of the function specified with function instruction TMR, instruction to a val
  • Page 908A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER98 ILLEGAL LASER CON- Modify the allocation of the I/O module. When an I/O device for a laser is used, NECTION the allocation of the I/O module does not match the actual I/O device configura- tion. ER99 X,Y
  • Page 909B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents WN21 COMMON MEM. ENTRY Modify the ENTRY in the shared memory When a PMC C board is used, the ERROR GDT in the link control statement. ENTRY in the shared memory GDT is out of range. WN22 LADDER 3 PRIORITY ER-
  • Page 910A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents WN32 LNK CONTROL DATA ER- 1) Check that the address of When a PMC C board is used, link con- ROR RC_CTLNB_INIT is set for the PMC trol statement (program control) data is system parameter, LANGUAGE ORI- inval
  • Page 911B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST (2) Alarm messages (PMC–SA1) Message Contents and solution ALARM NOTHING Normal status ER00 PROGRAM DATA The sequence program in the ROM is not written correctly. ERROR(ROM) (solution) Please exchange ROM for the sequence program. ER01 PROGRAM DATA The sequence pr
  • Page 912A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Message Contents and solution ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Transferring the sequence program from offline programmer was interrupted by the BY I/O power off etc. (solution) Please clear the sequence program and transfer the sequence program again. ER19 LADDER DATA ERRO
  • Page 913B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Message Contents and solution ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT The number of the output data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which DATA IN GROUP(xx) exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective. (solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each g
  • Page 914A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Message Contents and solution WN19 GDT ERROR The value of BASE, LIMIT or ENTRY of user defined GDT is illegal. (BASE,LIMIT) (solution) Please correct the address in link control statement and build file. WN20 COMMON MEM. COUNT The number of common memories exceeds
  • Page 915B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Message Contents and solution WN32 LNK CONTROL DATA ER- Link control statement data is illegal. ROR (solution) Please confirm whether the address of symbol RC_ CTLB_INIT in map file is set to LANGUAGE ORIGIN of the system parameter. Or, please make the link contro
  • Page 916A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 (3) System alarm messages (PMC–SB7) Message Contents and solution 1 PC004 CPU ERR A CPU error occurred in the PMC. xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy indicate internal error code. PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy If this error occurs, the motherboard may be fa
  • Page 917B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Message Contents and solution 5 PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK) A stack error occurred during execution of ladder function instruction CALL/CALLU. Solution) Check the correspondence between the CALL/CALLU instruction and SPE instruction. If the error cannot be located, r
  • Page 918A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 (4) System alarm messages (for the C language board) Message Contents and solution 1 PC1nn CPU INTERRT CPU error (abnormal interrupt) xxxxyyyyyy nn : Exception code Exception code of the i80486. For details, refer to the relevant manual that describes the CPU. 00
  • Page 919B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST (5) Alarm messages (For EDIT: PMC–SB7) Messages displayed during update of the PMC ladder diagram editing Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents OVERLAPPED COM If COME is missing, add it in proper posi- There is no COME that corresponds to tion. I
  • Page 920A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents DUPLICATE END1 Remove extra END1, END2 or END3. Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are DUPLICATE END2 found. DUPLICATE END3 GARBAGE AFTER END Remove unnecessary nets, and move There are some nets after END, END2 or
  • Page 921B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a subprogram Destination of JMPC is not level 2. to level 2. If the JMPC is unnecessary, re- move it. If another LBL of same L–address that the JMPC is inte
  • Page 922A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, remove Plural TMRs have the same number as (WARNING) them. If all of them are necessary, assign their parameter. other number to parameter of them to (Thi
  • Page 923B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Messages that may be displayed during net editing on PMC program editor screen Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents TOO MANY FUNCTIONAL Only one functional instruction is allowed Too many functional instructions are in INSTRUCTIONS IN ONE NET to
  • Page 924A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 (6) Alarm messages (For EDIT) Message Contents and solution ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The address of the relay/coil is not set. FUNCTION NOT FOUND There is no functional instruction of the input number. COM FUNCTION MISSING The funcitonal instruction COM (SUB29) is not
  • Page 925B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Message Contents and solution PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO. Please input the number of the functional instruction. (solution) If you do not input the functional instruction, please push soft key “FUNC” again. PROGRAM MODULE NOTHING You tried to edit though there was neith
  • Page 926A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 (7) Error Messages (at Automatic Write to Flash ROM after Ladder Editing) Error message Contents and solution PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM. (At BLANK) PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM. (EXEC?) (Remedy) Wh
  • Page 927B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST (8) Error Messages (at Assignment Data Editing) Message Contents and solution ERR: GROUP NO. (0—15) The group number must be 0 to 15. ERR: BASE NO. (0—1) The base number must be 0 or 1. WARN: BASE NO. MUST BE 0 For I/O Unit–B, the base number must be 0. The base n
  • Page 928A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 (9) Alarm messages (For I/O) Error message Contents and solution PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM. (At BLANK) PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM. (EXEC ?) Remedy) When the message is displayed, pressing the EXE
  • Page 929B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST Error message Contents and solution CREATE ERROR The specified file name is illegal. Remedy) Specify a file name in the MS–DOS form. (See 7.2 (5)) NO MORE SPACE or WRITE ERROR There is not enough free space on the memory card. Remedy) Delete files to create free s
  • Page 930A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 A.3 ALARM LIST When a serial spindle alarm occurs, the following number is displayed on (SERIAL SPINDLE) the CNC. n is a number corresponding to the spindle on which an alarm occurs. (n = 1: First spindle; n = 2: Second spindle; etc.) NOTE*1 Note that the meanings
  • Page 931B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n06 SPN_n_ : THERMAL 06 1 Check and correct the parameter. The temperature sensor of the motor SENSOR DIS- 2 Replace the feedback cable. is disconnected. CONNECT 7n07 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED 07
  • Page 932A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n24 SPN_n_ : SERIAL 24 1 Place the CNC–to–spindle cable The CNC power is turned off (normal TRANSFER away from the power cable. power–off or broken cable). ERROR 2 Replace the cable. An err
  • Page 933B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n34 SPN_n_ : PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according Parameter data exceeding the allow- SETTING ER- to the manual. able limit is set. ROR If the parameter number is unknown, conne
  • Page 934A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n47 SPN_n_ : POS–CODER 47 1 Replace the cable. 1 The A/B phase signal of the SIGNAL AB- 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector NORMAL 3 Correct the cable layout
  • Page 935B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n58 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD IN 58 1 Check the PSM cooling status. The temperature of the radiator of the PSM 2 Replace the PSM unit. PSM has increased abnormally. (PSM alarm indication: 3) 7n59 S
  • Page 936A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n88 SPN_n_ : COOLING RA- 88 Replace the SPM external cooling The external cooling fan stopped. DIFAN FAIL- fan. URE 7n97 SPN_n_ : OTHER 97 Replace the SPM. Another irregularity was detected
  • Page 937B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9011 SPN_n_ : OVERVOLT 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Overvoltage of the DC link section of POW CIRCUIT 2 Check the input power voltage and the PSM was detected. (PSM alarm change in power dur
  • Page 938A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9029 SPN_n_ : SHORTTIME 29 Check and correct the load status. Excessive load has been applied OVERLOAD continuously for a certain period of time. (This alarm is issued also when the motor sh
  • Page 939B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9042 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT. 42 1 Replace the cable. 1 The 1–rotation signal of the POS–CODER 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector DETECT JY4) is disconnected. 2 Th
  • Page 940A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9056 SPN_n_ : INNER COOL- 56 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the SPM control cir- ING FAN STOP cuit stopped. 9057 SPN_n_ : EX DECEL- 57 1 Decrease the acceleration/decel- An overloa
  • Page 941B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9086 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT 86 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one–rotation signal of the spindle SPNDL SEN- 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor cannot be correctly detected. SOR ERROR 9087 SPN_n_ : SP
  • Page 942A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE) NOTE*1 Note that the meanings of the SPM indications differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on. When the yellow LED is on, an error code is indicated with a 2–digit number. The error code is not displayed on the C
  • Page 943B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST SPM indica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 12 During execution of the spindle synchronization com- Although spindle synchronization is being performed, mand, do not specify another operation mode. Before another operation mode (Cs contour control,
  • Page 944B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 B LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS Item Ordering information Remarks Fuse LCD–mounted type control unit (without PC) A02B–0236–K100 CNC display unit for is series CNC LCD–mounted type is series control unit A02B–0236–K101 Stand–alone type is series control
  • Page 945B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM C BOOT SYSTEM C.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916 C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918 C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . .
  • Page 946C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 C.1 The boot system load the CNC system software (flash RAM→DRAM), then starts it so that software can be executed. OVERVIEW The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the CNC: (1) Registering a file in flash ROM ⋅ Reads a file from a memory
  • Page 947B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM 2 When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start the CNC Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts transferring files from flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason, a file required to start the CNC (NC basic) is not in flash RO
  • Page 948C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 C.2 When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is displayed. This screen is described below : SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE D MAIN MENU screen (1) SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M5-01 (2) 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING (3) 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
  • Page 949B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM C.2.1 System Data Loading Screen D Description This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card into flash ROM. D Screen configuration (1) SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1 FILE DIRECTORY (2) B1H1A_B1.MEM B1H1A_AI.MEM (3) END *** MESSAGE *** (4) SELECT
  • Page 950C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 3 To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO] key. *** MESSAGE *** LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD. 4 When loading terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see C.3 *** MESS
  • Page 951B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM C.2.2 System Data Check Screen D Description This screen is used to list files in flash ROM, together with the corresponding numbers of 128–KB management units in each file and the series and edition of the software. D Screen configuration (1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1
  • Page 952C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 D Operating procedure 1 Select the file whose details are required. For example, select “1 NC BASIC (10).” 2 The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed, together with the series and edition of the software in each management unit. After check
  • Page 953B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM C.2.3 System Data Delete Screen D Description This screen is used to delete a user file from flash ROM. D Screen configuration (1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1/1 (2) [BOARD:MAIN] FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 16MB) (3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10) 2 NC2 BSIC ( 8) 3 DGB0SRVO ( 2) 4 PS0B
  • Page 954C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 4 When deletion terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. *** MESSAGE *** DELETING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. D Others 1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen The system files are protected from acci
  • Page 955B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the [SELECT] soft key. 2 The system displays the following confirmation message : *** MESSAGE *** SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO. 3 To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel,
  • Page 956C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 C.2.5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen D Description This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, programs, and other data, retained after the CNC power in SRAM is turned off, to and from a memory card. D Screen configuration Select “4 SRAM DATA BACKUP
  • Page 957B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM D Operating procedure [Backing up data] 1 Select “1. SRAM BACKUP.” The following confirmation message is displayed. The backup file name may be displayed according to the SRAM capacity. 2 Press [YES] to start backup. *** MESSAGE *** BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES
  • Page 958C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 D Others 1 Name of backup file The name of the backup file written to the memory card by the SRAM backup function depends on the size of the SRAM installed in the CNC. When the size of SRAM is 1MB or larger, backup files are created in units of 512 KB. Number of
  • Page 959B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM C.2.6 MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen D Description This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card. D Screen configuration (1) SRAM DATA LOADING 1/1 FILE DIRECTORY (2) B1H1A_B1.MEM B1H1A_A1.MEM (3) END *** MESSAGE *** (4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [
  • Page 960C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 C.2.7 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Function D Description This function is used to format a memory card. Memory cards must be formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can be re–used after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for exam
  • Page 961B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM C.2.8 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM Function D Description The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC. D Operating procedure From the MAIN MENU screen, select “9. END.” The system displays the “ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO” message. To terminate th
  • Page 962C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 2 If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing selection state as shown below : SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M5-01 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP 6. MEMORY CARD FILE
  • Page 963B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM C.3 The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical order. ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS Message Description and required action B BOOT ROM PARITY. The contents of flash memory containing boot software was de- PLEASE POWER OFF. stroyed
  • Page 964C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Message Description and required action M MAX EXTENSION OVER. The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031. Delete any HIT SELECT KEY. unnecessary backup files from the memory card. MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. The memory card’s battery is exhausted. Repla
  • Page 965B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM CAUTION 1 Action to be taken when an SRAM parity error is detected during backup of SRAM in the boot system The SRAM area of each CNC shipped from the factory is cleared and is free of parity errors. However, shock applied to the CNC during transportation may cau
  • Page 966D. MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 D MEMRY CARD SLOT D.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937 D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) . . . . . . . . 938 D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 936
  • Page 967B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX D. MEMORY CARD SLOT D.1 Whether a memory card slot is provided or not depends on the hardware configuration. See the following table: OVERVIEW Hardware Card slot on LCD unit Card slot on control unit configuration Type 1 Provided No card slot Type 2 Provided Provided Type 6 (Th
  • Page 968D. MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 D.2 SRAM memory card FROM memory card Data I/O MEMORY CARD Flash ATA card TYPES (FUNCTIONS) Modem card (for remote diagnosis) NOTE For details of the types of usable memory cards, see the ordering list. 938
  • Page 969B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX D. MEMORY CARD SLOT D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION D Type 1 LCD–mounted type LCD MDI Card slot on LCD unit Control unit (LCD–mounted type) D Type 2 Stand–alone type (with an LCD unit) Card slot on Optical cable LCD control unit LCD MDI link card Card slot on LCD unit LCD unit for s
  • Page 970D. MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 D Type 4 Stand–alone type (with CNC display unit with PC functions or an PANEL i and FA keyboard or PC) Card slot on control unit PC Optical cable FA keyboard HSSB board CNC display unit with PC functions, PANEL i, or Control unit personal computer D Type 5
  • Page 971E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT E LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT E.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942 E.2 LAYOUT OF THE 7–SEGMENT LED AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 972E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 E.1 FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i (referred to as FS16i hereinafter) of stand–alone type is equipped with a 7–segment LED, rotary switch, and OVERVIEW push switch. When no MDI is included in the system configuration or when the
  • Page 973E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT E.2 The 7–segment LED, rotary switch, and push switch are located as shown below. LAYOUT OF THE 7–SEGMENT LED AND SWITCHES 7–segment LED (STATUS) Rotary switch (MTSW) Push switch (PSW) 943
  • Page 974E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 E.3 OPERATION E.3.1 Before turning on the power, select a function number by using the rotary Operation Before switch. When the power is turned on after the selection with the rotary switch, the number corresponding to the
  • Page 975E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT E.3.3 Seven–Segment LED Display E.3.3.1 NC status display Number displayed on LED Blink/not blink Description Not blink Automatic operation is paused, stopped, or reset. (Rotation of character ) Not blink Automatic operati
  • Page 976E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 E.3.3.4 When a system alarm is issued, a number blinks on the 7–segment LED. LED display when a Number on LED System alarm Type of system alarm system alarm is issued (blinking) number In the 900’s ROM PARITY In the 910’s
  • Page 977E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT E.3.3.5 Display on the Number displayed On/off status of Meaning 7–segment LED at on LED 4 LEDs power–on jjjj Power is not on. JJJJ Power is turned on, but the CPU does not yet start. JJJJ NC system loading is started by t
  • Page 978E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 E.3.4 Operation of Each Function D Function number 2 This function sets a device number for the display link function. (1) Check that number 2 blinks on the LED, and press the push switch. (2) Number 2 is displayed on the
  • Page 979E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT D Function number 8 This function saves battery backed–up main board data in a memory card at a time. The data saved using this function can be restored at a time by performing the operation for function number A or by usi
  • Page 980F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 F MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) F.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951 F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 981F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX (BOOT–UP AND IPL) F.1 When the 160i/180i/210i is used or the CNC is connected to the PC over HSSB, Ncboot32.exe can be used for the maintenance of the CNC. When OVERVIEW the 160is/180is/210is is used, Ncbootis.exe can be used for the maintenance of th
  • Page 982F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 F.2 With the rotary switch on the HSSB board on the CNC side (when the CNC does not have the PC function) or on the motherboard of the CNC CHANGING START (when the CNC has the PC function), the start sequence can be changed. SEQUENCE
  • Page 983F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX (BOOT–UP AND IPL) D HSSB interface board of 16i/18i/21i of LCD–mounted type Rotary switch D HSSB interface board of 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/ 210is of stand–alone type Rotary switch D Stand–alone type 160is/180is/210is Rear of unit Rotar
  • Page 984F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 F.3 EXPLANATION OF NOTE SCREENS A mouse is required to display Ncboot32.exe screens. F.3.1 Boot Screen When the sub–board is provided, select a board in the [Board] list. The area where the file is to be placed can be changed by usin
  • Page 985F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX (BOOT–UP AND IPL) F.3.1.1 The following screen is used for manipulating system data (including System data control software and ladder programs) on the NC. manipulation [Load...] opens the file selection screen. Specify a file to be loaded. [Save] sav
  • Page 986F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 F.3.1.2 This screen is used to store and restore NC SRAM data. SRAM operation [Backup] stores SRAM data, and [Restore] restores SRAM data. In the center of the screen, the progress status is displayed. As with the NC, the backup file
  • Page 987F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX (BOOT–UP AND IPL) F.3.1.3 The following screen is used for operating files on a memory card in the File operation CNC or in a folder of the PC. [Delete] deletes a selected file. [Format] formats the memory card. This button is valid when the memory ca
  • Page 988F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 F.3.2 IPL Screen NOTE The contents of the IPL screen vary depending on the CNC model. Follow the instructions displayed in the menu. The CNC allows functions to be performed according to the key status set at power–on. The open CNC d
  • Page 989F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX (BOOT–UP AND IPL) F.3.2.1 Functions on the IPL Corresponding MDI screen key operation at Title on IPL screen power–on (Operation with a standard CNC) 0. EXIT 1. 0. CANCEL MEMORY CLEAR 1. ALL MEMORY 0. CANCEL 1. ALL + 2. SUB + <2
  • Page 990F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Corresponding MDI key operation at Title on IPL screen power–on (Operation with a standard CNC) 2. 0. CANCEL SETTING 1. IGNORE OVER 0. CANCEL TRAVEL ALARM 1. CNC +

    2. LOADER + 2. START WITHOUT 0. CANCEL LADDER 1.

  • Page 991F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX (BOOT–UP AND IPL) F.4 OTHER SCREENS F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen This screen appears when a system alarm is issued in the CNC. (The above screen is an example. The displayed information varies depending on the system alarm issued in the CNC.) 961
  • Page 992F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 F.4.2 To open the status screen, double–click the icon in the system tray. Status Screen Alternatively, in the menu popped up by right–clicking, click OPEN. (160i/180i/210i) Node: Node number Name: Node name. (Define the node name in
  • Page 993F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX (BOOT–UP AND IPL) Status screen The status screen appears when the system tray icon is double–clicked or (160is/180is/210is) NCBOOTis is restarted. This screen can be used to change the list of files to save, restore, or start as well as to check the
  • Page 994F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 [Backup unit Enable] When this check box is checked, the registry and files are automatically saved during power–down. After power–down, the special battery is used to supply the power during saving. [High Priority] This check box is
  • Page 995G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS G FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/MATERIALS G.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 G.2 SLAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967 G.3 AUTOMATIC SETTING . . . . . . . .
  • Page 996G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 G.1 With a system that uses the FSSB, the parameters below need to be set for axis setting. (Set other parameters as usually done.) OVERVIEW D No. 1023 D No. 1905 D No. 1910 to 1919 D No. 1936, 1937 For setting of these parameters, three me
  • Page 997G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS G.2 In a system using the FSSB, the CNC, servo amplifiers, and separate detector interface units are connected with each other via optical cables. SLAVE These amplifiers and pulse modules are referred to as slaves. Assume that a 2–axis ampl
  • Page 998G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 G.3 When the following parameters are set, automatic setting can be performed using the FSSB setting screen: AUTOMATIC Bit 0 of No. 1902 = 0 SETTING Bit 1 of No. 1902 = 0 For automatic setting on the FSSB setting screen, use the procedure b
  • Page 999G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS 11 Pressing the continuous menu key several times displays [FSSB]. 12 Pressing soft key [FSSB] switches the screen display to the amplifier setting screen, and displays the following soft keys: [ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINT ][ ][ (OPRT) ] 13 Press
  • Page 1000G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 G.3.1 [Sample Setting 1] General Configuration (Semi–Closed Loop) Z–axis A–axis X–axis Y–axis Step 1 Set the following with parameter No. 1023: X:1 Y:2 Z:3 A:4 Step 2 Initialize the servo parameters for each axis. Step 3 Turn on then off th
  • Page 1001G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS Step 7 Pressing the continuous menu key several times displays [FSSB]. Step 8 Pressing soft key [FSSB] switches the screen display to the amplifier setting screen, and displays the following soft keys: [ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINT ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
  • Page 1002G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 (Amplifier setting) No. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. [AXIS] NAME 1 A1–L α SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y 2 A2–L α SVM 40A [ 1 ] X 3 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A 4 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z NO. EXTRA TYPE PCB ID 5 M1 A 0008 DETECTOR(4AXES) > MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56 [ AMP
  • Page 1003G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS G.3.3 [Sample Setting 3] When the C–Axis is a Cs Axis Z–axis A–axis X–axis Y–axis C–axis 1 Spindle Amplifiers Cs contour control axis Step 1 Set the following with parameter No. 1023: X:1 Z:2 C : –1 Y:3 A:4 Step 2 Initialize the servo param
  • Page 1004G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Step 5 Enter the axis numbers on the amplifier setting screen. (AMPLIFIER SETTING) No. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. [AXIS] NAME 1 A1–L α SVM 40A [ 2 ] Z 2 A2–L α SVM 40A [ 1 ] X 3 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A 4 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 3 ] Y NO. EXTRA TYPE PCB I
  • Page 1005G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS G.3.4 The following two pairs of axes are tandem axes: [Sample Setting 4] [The X–axis is a master axis, and the A–axis is a slave axis.] Tandem Control [The Y–axis is a master axis, and the B–axis is a slave axis.] Configuration 4 servo amp
  • Page 1006G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Step 4 Enter the axis numbers on the amplifier setting screen. (AMPLIFIER SETTING) No. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. [AXIS] NAME 1 A1–L α SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y 2 A2–L α SVM 40A [ 1 ] X 3 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A 4 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z 5 A4–L α SVM 40A [ 5
  • Page 1007G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS G.3.5 [EGB workpiece axis: A–axis, EGB dummy axis: B–axis (No. 7771 = [Sample Setting 5] 5)] When the Simple Electronic Gear Box (EGB) Function is Used Connector 1 (CN1) 3 Servo Amplifiers B–axis scale Z–axis A–axis X–axis Y–axis Machine si
  • Page 1008G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Step 4 Enter the axis numbers on the amplifier setting screen. (AMPLIFIER SETTING) No. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. [AXIS] NAME 1 A1–L α SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y 2 A2–L α SVM 40A [ 1 ] X 3 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A 4 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z NO. EXTRA TYPE PCB I
  • Page 1009G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS G.4 When the following parameters are set, each axis can be set manually: MANUAL SETTING 2 No.1902#0=1 No.1902#1=0 When performing manual setting, set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937, fully understanding their f
  • Page 1010G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Con- Program Servo Interface trolled axis name axis No. type axis No. No.1020 No.1023 Fast/Slow 2–axis AMP 1–axis AMP 2–axis AMP 1–axis AMP #6 (PM1) The first separate detector interface unit is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. #7 (PM2) The second
  • Page 1011G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS The slave is the generic name of a servo amplifier or separate detector interface unit connected to the CNC via an FSSB optical cable. The numbers from 1 to 10 are assigned to the slaves in ascending order; a younger number is assigned to a
  • Page 1012G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 ` Axis configuration and example of parameter setting Slave ATR No. No.1910 AXIS Control Axis Name Servo to 1919 No. No.1020 Axis No. No.1023 1 axis AMP L–axis 2 axis AMP M–axis L–axis 2 axis AMP M–axis M1 1 axis AMP M2 M1/M2 : Separate det
  • Page 1013G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS ` Axis configuration and example of parameter setting when the simple electronic gear box (EGB) function is used (EGB workpiece axis: A–axis, EGB axis: B–axis (parameter No. 7771 = 5)) Slave ATR No. No.1910 AXIS Control Axis Name Servo to 1
  • Page 1014G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Example: Con- First con- Second No.1936 No.1937 No.1905 trolled nector connector (#7,#6) axis number number X 1 Not used 0 0 0,1 Y Not used 2 0 1 1,0 Z Not used 1 0 0 1,0 A Not used Not used 0 0 0,0 B 2 Not used 1 0 0,1 C Not used 3 0 2 1,0
  • Page 1015G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS No. 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 0 1 2 3 4 16 5 48 40 40 No. 1023 1905#0 1905#6 1905#7 1936 1937 FSBSL FSBM1 FSBM2 X 1 0 1 0 0 0 Y 3 0 0 1 0 1 Z 4 1 0 1 0 0 A 2 1 0 0 0 0 B 5 0 1 0 1 0 C 6 1 0 1 0 2 985
  • Page 1016G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 G.5 When the following parameters are set, manual setting 1 is enabled: MANUAL SETTING 1 Bit 0 of No. 1092 = 0 Bit 1 of No. 1902 = 0 Nos. 1910 through 1919 = 0 (all set to 0) In manual setting 1, a setting is made at power–on so that the va
  • Page 1017G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS G.6 Alarms related to pulse coders ALARMS NC alarm Message Description No. 360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A checksum error occurred in the built–in CHECKSUM (INT) pulse coder. 361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE A phase data error occurred in the built–in D
  • Page 1018G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Alarms related to servo amplifiers NC alarm Message Description No. 430 n AXIS : SV. MOTOR OVER- A servo motor overheat occurred. HEAT 431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD 1) PSM: Overheat occurred. 2) β series SVU: Overheat occurred. 432 n AXIS : CN
  • Page 1019G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS NC alarm Message Description No. 443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FAN 1) PSM: The internal stirring fan failed. FAILURE 2) PSMR: The internal stirring fan failed. 3) β series SVU: The internal stirring fan failed. 444 n AXIS : INV. COOLING FAN SVM
  • Page 1020G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Alarms related to servo amplifiers NC alarm Message Description No. 460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCON- FSSB communication was disconnected NECT suddenly. The possible causes are as fol- lows: 1) The FSSB communication cable is dis- connected or brok
  • Page 1021G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS P/S alarms NC alarm Message Description No. 5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIME The FSSB did not become ready to open OUT duringinitialization. 5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE The FSSB entered an error mode. 5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS The number of amplifie
  • Page 1022G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 G.7 D MDI input is abnormal (each time data is entered, the power needs to be turned off). ACTIONS FOR First, disconnect the optical cable of the NC, then turn off then on the TROUBLE power. Next, check the items below. ENCOUNTERED AT (A) C
  • Page 1023G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS Action: When automatic setting on the FSSB screen is not performed, set all of parameter Nos. 1902, 1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937 to 0 before starting manual setting. D The invalid amplifier/motor combination alarm (466) is issued
  • Page 1024G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 G.8 EXAMPLES OF SETTINGS USING OTHER CONNECTIONS G.8.1 Example 1: Learning Control D Conceptual diagram of When learning control is used, one NC controlled axis uses one DSP (two FSSB parameter setting axes of the servo axis card) exclusive
  • Page 1025G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS G.8.2 Example: FSSB setting for the following: Example 2: When a Hardware connection 2–Axis Amplifier is Mother board – 2–axis amplifier (LX/LZ) – 2–axis amplifier Shared by Two Paths (LA/RA) – 2–axis amplifier (LC/RC) Sub–board – 2–axis am
  • Page 1026G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 Path 1 Axis Name Axis card Amplifi- er/motor Path 2 Axis Name Axis card Amplifi- er/motor (3) Set an axis card number (DSP number) in parameter No. 1023 to connect an NC controlled axis with a motor. (4) For an axis for which an even number
  • Page 1027G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS Path 1 Axis Name Axis card Amplifi- er/motor Path 2 Axis Name Axis card Amplifi- er/motor 997
  • Page 1028G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 G.9 The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB–based amplifier and axis information, and allows amplifier and axis information to be set. FSSB DATA DISPLAY 1 Press function key SYSTEM . 2 Pressing the continuous menu key several times displays [
  • Page 1029G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS D AXIS NO: Controlled axis number The controlled axis numbers set in parameter Nos. 1920 through 1929 are displayed. When a value outside the range 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes is set, 0 is displayed. D NAME: Controlled axis n
  • Page 1030G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 The axis setting screen displays the items below. D AXIS NO: Controlled axis number The NC controlled axis numbers are displayed sequentially. D NAME: Controlled axis name D AMP: Type of amplifier connected to each axis D M1: Connector numb
  • Page 1031G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/ B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS (AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE) O1000 N00001 NO. 1 X 01A 970123 01 2 Y 01A 970123 01 3 Z 01A 970123 01 4 A 02B 970123 01 5 B 02B 970123 01 6 C 02B 970123 01 MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56 [ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINT ][ ][ (OPRT) ] The amplifier maintenance s
  • Page 1032H. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS APPENDIX B–63525EN/02 H NOTATION OF MDI KEYS i series CNC have two types of MDI keypads : English type and Symbolic type. The table below shows correspondence between English keys and Symbolic keys. This manual uses English type in the text. Therefore when a user uses Symboli
  • Page 1033B–63525EN/02 APPENDIX H. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS Name English key Symbolic key ALTER key ALTER INSERT key INSERT DELETE key DELETE PAGE UP key PAGE PAGE PAGE DOWN key HELP key HELP RESET key RESET CUSTOM CUSTOM/GRAPH key GRAPH 1003
  • Page 1034
  • Page 1035B–63525EN/02 Index ƠSymbolsơ Alarms 910 and 911 (Sram Parity), 796 Alarms 912 to 919 (Dram Parity), 799 [Sample setting 1] general configuration (semi–closed loop), 970 Alarms 920 and 921 (Servo Alarms), 801 [Sample setting 2] general configuration (closed loop), 971 Amplifier maintenance screen, 10
  • Page 1036INDEX B–63525EN/02 Confirming the parameters required for data output, 402 Error messages and required actions, 933 Connector and card configurations of printed circuit boards, Ethernet Board, 215 280 Example 1: learning control, 994 Contents displayed, 66 Example 2: when a 2–axis amplifier is share
  • Page 1037B–63525EN/02 INDEX Help function, 63 ƠJơ Help screen, 20 Jog Operation Cannot be Done, 731 Host file deletion, 641 Host file list display, 638 Host file search, 641 ƠKơ HSSB interface board, 208, 303 Kind of data in sub memory, 419 ƠIơ ƠLơ I/O, 227 Layout of the 7–segment LED and switches, 943 I/O L
  • Page 1038INDEX B–63525EN/02 Method B of gear change for machining center (PRM Outputting CNC parameters, 403 3705#2=1), 701 Outputting custom macro common variables, 431 Module configuration screen, 27 Outputting custom macro variable values, 405 Mother Board of CNC Display Unit for is Series, 319 Outputting
  • Page 1039B–63525EN/02 INDEX Replacing the Fuse, 389 OFFSET Soft key transition triggered by the function key SETTING , 13, Replacing the fuse of the control unit, 342 15 Replacing the fuse of the LCD unit, 348 Replacing the Fuse on the Units, 265 Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS ,3 Repla
  • Page 1040INDEX B–63525EN/02 System reserve area of internal relay, 451 Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network, 620 System screen, 17 Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network, 613 Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network, 619 Using the FTP file transfer function on a small net
  • Page 1041Revision Record FANUCĄSeries 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–63525EN) D Addition of following models: – Series 160is/180is/210is–MODEL B 02 Nov., 2001 – Series 18i/180i/180is–MB5 D Addition of functions D Addition of alarms 01 Jun., 2001 Edition Date Conten
  • Page 1042
  • Page 1043TECHNICAL REPORT(MANUAL) NO. TMN03/058E Date July,10, 2003 General Manager of CNC Laboratory Series160is/180is/210is -MODEL B CE card with IO Transfer Function Maintenance Manual 1. Communicate this report to: ○ Your information only (ED12 only) GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics MILACRON Machine
  • Page 1044Series160is/180is/210is -MODEL B CE card with IO Transfer Function Maintenance Manual The CE card is configured from 2 card printed-circuit boards (CE card 1 and CE card 2). The compact flash card is attached on the CE card 1. 1. CE card configuration Spacer CE card 2 CE card 1 Compact flash card So
  • Page 10452. Removing the CE card Removing from the Main board CE card assembly Main board Remove CE card assembly (both of a CE card 1 and CE card 2) from the Main board, to hold by both edges of these cards. Removing the compact flash card from CE card 1 Compact flash card is installed on the card socket of
  • Page 1046Separating CE card 1 from CE card 2 Remove screw 1 that is fixed CE card 1, and pull out CE card 1. Spacer CE card 2 CE card 1 Screw 2 Screw 1 1.Remove Screw 1 2.Pull out CE card 1 CE card Side view 3. Installing CE card To install CE card, reverse the procedure for removing them. WARNING Please ins
  • Page 1047Assembling CE card 1 and CE card 2 Assembling CE card 1 and CE card 2,push only the hatched area in figure (Back of connector connecting CE card 1 and CE card2). After Assemble CE card 1 and CE card 2,fix CE card 1 with screws. CE card 1 CE card 2 Connector（Connecting CE card 1 and CE card2） (Side B
  • Page 1048TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN02/032E Date 22. March 2002. General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i – MODEL A MAINTENANCE MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is – MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is – MA OPERAT
  • Page 1049Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option (FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is – TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL) (FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i – TB OPERATOR’S MANUAL) １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is – TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Name FANUC Series 1
  • Page 1050Please add the following description in ”APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST” . 11) ALARM FOR FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option can be confirmed by Power Mate CNC Manager function. Number Alarm type 000 to 299 Program or setting alarm 300 to 399, 401
  • Page 1051No. LED display Description Countermeasure Input data 2 is invalid. Check input data 2, specified with a function 251 code. A function code or mode is invalid. Check the command code, specified with a 254 function code. Check the mode. Operation cannot be activated because an Check the mode. Check w
  • Page 1052No. LED display Description Countermeasure A soft phase alarm (SPHAL) was detected. Turn the power off. This alarm may be caused 308 by noise. When the absolute pulse coder is used, the Rotate the motor through more than one turn 319 motor has not yet rotated through more than in jog feed mode, then
  • Page 1053No. LED display Description Countermeasure The servo position error in the stop state is Determine the mechanical cause of the large 410 larger than the value specified in parameter position error. If no mechanical cause is found, No.110. specify a larger value for the parameter. The servo position
  • Page 1054No. LED display Description Countermeasure [SVU-40, SVU-80] This alarm is issued in the following cases: An overcurrent alarm or IPM alarm is issued. • This alarm is issued when an excessively large current flows in the main circuit. • This alarm is issued when an error (overcurrent, overheat, low I
  • Page 1055No. LED display Description Countermeasure A DC link low voltage alarm is issued. This alarm is issued when the DC voltage of the main circuit power is too low. (1) 190 ms or longer may pass from the time when both the *ESP of the built-in DI and the *ESP of the I/O link interface signal are cancele
  • Page 1056System alarms No. LED display Description Countermeasure An error was detected in the RAM write/read Replace the servo amplifier unit. - test at power-up. An error was detected in the data collation Turn the power off then back on. Then, - check for the non-volatile memory. re-enter the parameters.
  • Page 1057Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option (FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is – MA MAINTENANCE MANUAL)) (FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is – MB,18i/180i/180is – MB5,18i/180i/180is – MB MAINTENANCE MANUUAL) １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i
  • Page 1058Please add the following description in ”APPENDIX A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES” . Case of B-63005EN/02-2 (12) ALARM FOR FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option Case of B-63525EN/02-1 (14) ALARM FOR FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option can be c
  • Page 1059No. LED display Description Countermeasure Input data 2 is invalid. Check input data 2, specified with a function 251 code. A function code or mode is invalid. Check the command code, specified with a 254 function code. Check the mode. Operation cannot be activated because an Check the mode. Check w
  • Page 1060No. LED display Description Countermeasure A soft phase alarm (SPHAL) was detected. Turn the power off. This alarm may be caused 308 by noise. When the absolute pulse coder is used, the Rotate the motor through more than one turn 319 motor has not yet rotated through more than in jog feed mode, then
  • Page 1061No. LED display Description Countermeasure The servo position error in the stop state is Determine the mechanical cause of the large 410 larger than the value specified in parameter position error. If no mechanical cause is found, No.110. specify a larger value for the parameter. The servo position
  • Page 1062No. LED display Description Countermeasure [SVU-40, SVU-80] This alarm is issued in the following cases: An overcurrent alarm or IPM alarm is issued. • This alarm is issued when an excessively large current flows in the main circuit. • This alarm is issued when an error (overcurrent, overheat, low I
  • Page 1063No. LED display Description Countermeasure A DC link low voltage alarm is issued. This alarm is issued when the DC voltage of the main circuit power is too low. (1) 190 ms or longer may pass from the time when both the *ESP of the built-in DI and the *ESP of the I/O link interface signal are cancele
  • Page 1064System alarms No. LED display Description Countermeasure An error was detected in the RAM write/read Replace the servo amplifier unit. - test at power-up. An error was detected in the data collation Turn the power off then back on. Then, - check for the non-volatile memory. re-enter the parameters.
  • Page 1065TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN02/032E Date 22. March 2002. General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i – MODEL A MAINTENANCE MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is – MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is – MA OPERAT
  • Page 1066Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option (FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is – TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL) (FANUC Series 21i/210i – TB OPERATOR’S MANUAL) １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is – TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Name FANUC Series 21i/210i – TB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec. Ｂ－
  • Page 1067Please add the following description in ”APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST” . Case of B-63084EN/02-6 11) ALARM FOR FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option Case of B-63604EN/01-2 12) ALARM FOR FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option can be confirmed by
  • Page 1068No. LED display Description Countermeasure Input data 2 is invalid. Check input data 2, specified with a function 251 code. A function code or mode is invalid. Check the command code, specified with a 254 function code. Check the mode. Operation cannot be activated because an Check the mode. Check w
  • Page 1069No. LED display Description Countermeasure A soft phase alarm (SPHAL) was detected. Turn the power off. This alarm may be caused 308 by noise. When the absolute pulse coder is used, the Rotate the motor through more than one turn 319 motor has not yet rotated through more than in jog feed mode, then
  • Page 1070No. LED display Description Countermeasure The servo position error in the stop state is Determine the mechanical cause of the large 410 larger than the value specified in parameter position error. If no mechanical cause is found, No.110. specify a larger value for the parameter. The servo position
  • Page 1071No. LED display Description Countermeasure [SVU-40, SVU-80] This alarm is issued in the following cases: An overcurrent alarm or IPM alarm is issued. • This alarm is issued when an excessively large current flows in the main circuit. • This alarm is issued when an error (overcurrent, overheat, low I
  • Page 1072No. LED display Description Countermeasure A DC link low voltage alarm is issued. This alarm is issued when the DC voltage of the main circuit power is too low. (1) 190 ms or longer may pass from the time when both the *ESP of the built-in DI and the *ESP of the I/O link interface signal are cancele
  • Page 1073System alarms No. LED display Description Countermeasure An error was detected in the RAM write/read Replace the servo amplifier unit. - test at power-up. An error was detected in the data collation Turn the power off then back on. Then, - check for the non-volatile memory. re-enter the parameters.
  • Page 1074TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN02/032E Date 22. March 2002. General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i – MODEL A MAINTENANCE MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is – MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is – MA OPERAT
  • Page 1075Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option (FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is – MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL) (FANUC Series 21i/210i – MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL) １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is – MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Name FANUC Series 21i/210i – MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec. Ｂ－
  • Page 1076Please add the following description in ”APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST” . Case of B-63094EN/02-5 11) ALARM FOR FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option Case of B-63614EN/01-2 12) ALARM FOR FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option can be confirmed by
  • Page 1077No. LED display Description Countermeasure Input data 2 is invalid. Check input data 2, specified with a function 251 code. A function code or mode is invalid. Check the command code, specified with a 254 function code. Check the mode. Operation cannot be activated because an Check the mode. Check w
  • Page 1078No. LED display Description Countermeasure A soft phase alarm (SPHAL) was detected. Turn the power off. This alarm may be caused 308 by noise. When the absolute pulse coder is used, the Rotate the motor through more than one turn 319 motor has not yet rotated through more than in jog feed mode, then
  • Page 1079No. LED display Description Countermeasure The servo position error in the stop state is Determine the mechanical cause of the large 410 larger than the value specified in parameter position error. If no mechanical cause is found, No.110. specify a larger value for the parameter. The servo position
  • Page 1080No. LED display Description Countermeasure [SVU-40, SVU-80] This alarm is issued in the following cases: An overcurrent alarm or IPM alarm is issued. • This alarm is issued when an excessively large current flows in the main circuit. • This alarm is issued when an error (overcurrent, overheat, low I
  • Page 1081No. LED display Description Countermeasure A DC link low voltage alarm is issued. This alarm is issued when the DC voltage of the main circuit power is too low. (1) 190 ms or longer may pass from the time when both the *ESP of the built-in DI and the *ESP of the I/O link interface signal are cancele
  • Page 1082System alarms No. LED display Description Countermeasure An error was detected in the RAM write/read Replace the servo amplifier unit. - test at power-up. An error was detected in the data collation Turn the power off then back on. Then, - check for the non-volatile memory. re-enter the parameters.
  • Page 1083TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 03/024E Date : Mar.17.’03 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is - MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL Description addition to Appendix A. ALARM LIST 1. Communicate this report to : ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE F
  • Page 1084Attached new alarm list is added to Appendix A. “ALARM LIST”. Concretely, 3/9 and 4/9 are added at the end of “(1) Program errors / Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm)“ in “A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES (CNC)”. 5/9, 6/9, and 7/9 are added at the end of “(6) Servo alarms (1/2)” in “A.1 LIST OF ALAR
  • Page 1085Program errors / Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm) Number Message Contents 5312 ILLEGAL COMMAND The mistake is found in the command format among G11 from G10 L75 IN G10 L75 / 76 / L76 / L77, or the instruction value exceeds the range of data. Please modify the program. 5316 TOOL TYPE NUMBE
  • Page 1086Program errors / Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm) Number Message Contents 5334 CS AXIS REF. RETURN Cs axis reference return is incomplete. INCOMPLETE 5339 FORMAT ERROR 1. The value of P/Q commanded at G51.4 / G50.4 / G51.5 / G50.5 / (T series) G51.6 / G50.6 block is not set to parameter N
  • Page 10874/9 Servo alarms (1/2) Number Message Contents 406 SERVO ALARM : Position control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system fault in the N AXIS WRONG ZRN reference position return of the n-th axis (axis 1-8), there is possibility that reference position return could not be executed correctly. Try a
  • Page 1088Servo alarms (1/2) Number Message Contents 480 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SAFETY MODE The monitor detected that safety signal mode D (state in which the (MNT) guard is open although no guard open request is input) was set, or the guard is open when guard unlock signal (*LGD) is not output. In the former, the
  • Page 1089Servo alarms (1/2) Number Message Contents 490 CNC SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR An error occurred in safety functions of CNC : 1. CNC or monitor detected the inexecution of CNC safety functions. 2. A mismatch between the CNC results of the safety functions and the monitor or spindle results of them occurre
  • Page 1090Servo alarms (2/2) Number Message Contents 608 n AXIS : INV. COOLING SVM : The internal stirring fan failed. FAN FAILURE (After the generation of this warning alarm, servo alarm 444 is generated in addition.) 609 n AXIS: INV. RADIATOR FAN The external dissipator stirring fan failed. FAILURE (After t
  • Page 1091Serial spindle alarms Number Message Contents 755 SPINDLE-1 SAFETY FUNCTION An error occurred in any spindle safety functions on the first spindle. ERROR 1. CNC detected that some spindle safety functions were not executed. 2. A safety parameter transfer error occurred. Replace the CPU card or spind
  • Page 1092FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is - MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL About the error messages of Embedded Ethernet 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is - MODEL B Name MAINTENANCE MANUAL Spec.No./Ed. B-63525EN/02 2.Summary o
  • Page 10938.9 ERROR MESSAGES If an error occurs with the embedded Ethernet function, the log screen of the embedded Ethernet function displays an error message. This section describes error messages displayed on the log screen. The major error messages are described below. If an error occurs, display the log
  • Page 1094FACTOLINK PORT NUMBER(%d) IS INVALID The setting(%d) of the TCP port number for FACTOLINK server is incorrect. Correct the TCP port number. FtpTransfer#%d IP ADDRESS(%s) IS INVALID The setting(%s) of the IP address for FTP transfer is incorrect. Correct the IP address. DNS SERVER IP ADDRESS(%s) IS I
  • Page 1095GETTING PARAMETER FROM DHCP SERVER The network parameters are gotten from the DHCP server. This is not an error message. SET DEFAULT FOCAS1/ETHERNET PARAMETER The default parameter of FOCAS1/Ethernet function was set. This is not an error message. SET DEFAULT DNC1/ETHERNET PARAMETER The default para
  • Page 1096Err FAIL TO CONNECT SOCKET Failed to connect to the FACTOLINK server. Check the FACTOLINK server is activated normally. 8.9.3 EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG Screen EMB_ETH PMC LOG Screen TCP PORT NUMBER(%d) IS INVALID The setting(%d) of the TCP port number for FOCAS1/Ethernet is incorrect. Correct the TCP
  • Page 1097Err EthAbortUpload() [%d] An error occurred when aborting upload data. The error code is [%d]. Err EthUploadSegment() [%d] An error occurred when sending upload data. The error code is [%d]. 8.9.4 EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG Screen Parameters are invalid The port number or IP address of the host comput
  • Page 1098Upload Error[%d] An error occurred under punching the NC data from the CNC memory to the personal computer. The error code was [%d]. Delete Error[%d] An error occurred under deleting the file from the personal computer. The error code was [%d]. File List Error[%d] An error occurred under getting the
  • Page 1099TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO.TMN 05 /076E Date: 2 August 2005 General Manager of CNC Laboratory Correction of FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MODEL B, FANUC Series 18i/180i/180is-MODEL B, FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-63525EN/02) 1. Communicate this report to: Your informatio
  • Page 11001. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MODEL B FANUC Series 18i/180i/180is-MODEL B FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is-MODEL B MAINTENACE MANUAL Spec.No./Version B-63525EN/02 2. Summary of change Group Name / Outline New, Add, Applicable Correct, Date Delete Basic Function O
  • Page 11011.8.2 Contents Displayed Detail of serial pulse coder Correct item "DGN 0201" as follow. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 0201 ALD EXP Amplifier overheat 0 - - - Overload Motor overheat alarm Motor overheat 1 - - - Amplifier overheat 1 - - 0 Built-in pulse coder (hand hard) Disconnection of separated typ
  • Page 1102FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is - MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL About the operations of memory clearing 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is - MODEL B Name MAINTENANCE MANUAL Spec.No./Ed. B-63525EN/02 2.Summary of Chan
  • Page 1103The table "Clear"(pp.118) in "1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS " is replaced with the following table. Data Func- prote- Param- Function Mode tion Operation Cleared data ction eter write=1 key key Memory all clear At － Single-path system All data on SRAM power ＜RESET＞AND＜DELETE＞ (Fixed form sentence, tool da
  • Page 1104The tables (pp.959-960) in "F.3.2.1 Functions on the IPL screen " are replaced with the following tables. Corresponding MDI key operation at power-on Title on IPL screen (operation with a standard CNC) 0.EXIT 1.MEMORY 0.CANCEL CLEAR 1.ALL MEMORY 0.CANCEL 1.ALL + 2.SUB +<2> 3.LOAD
  • Page 1105Corresponding MDI key operation at power-on Title on IPL screen (operation with a standard CNC) 2.SETTING 0.CANCEL 1.IGNORE OVER 0.CANCEL TRAVEL ALARM 1.CNC +

    2.LOADER + 2.START WITHOUT 0.CANCEL LADDER 1.CNC SIDE + 2.LOADER SIDE <.>+<5> 3.C LANGUAGE 0.CANCEL EXECUTOR 1.MAKE V